KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn Busch

KNX Technical Reference Manual Busch-priOn Busch
1473-1-8687 │
│ 29.01.2015
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Titelblätter/KNX/priOn/Titelblatt - priOn @ 9\mod_1269242014078_15.docx @ 52250 @ @ 1
Busch-priOn®
innovative and intuitive
Improved control elements. For example, the new 8.9 cm
(3.5”) TFT display as informative component of a flush-type
combination is both stylish and efficient. Its menu can be
individually adapted to every building and at all times
provides an overview of the electrical consumers. From here
the heating can be controlled, the lights dimmed or
comprehensive scenes called up that trigger numerous
preprogrammed actions. Meaningful symbols lead even the
untrained user to his objective in just a few steps. The
division of functions into individual areas such as light,
heating or blinds, assists everyone to find his way around
intuitively. Yet, this is not the end of possibilities for the
Busch-priOn® in classical building technology. The display
can also be used for controlling music.
=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Cover ===
The combination of pushbutton/rotary control element and
display has a universal operating concept. The definition of
a primary function makes its use particularly easy. The
primary function appears when one approaches the display
(a special proximity sensor is available) or when pressing
the rotary control element. In principle, any switching,
dimming, blinds, scene or sequence function that has been
stored in the unit can be defined as primary function. It is
only when the menu button is pressed that the display
changes to the circuit menu. Up to 8 entries can be
displayed via one symbol. By turning the pushbutton/rotary
control element the user can bring the desired function into
the foreground. An associated text below the focused
symbol is shown (e.g. system settings, room control office,
room control, living room, etc.). By activating the
pushbutton/rotary control element the display changes to the
respective list menu, which can consist of up to 15 different
functions. The user can scroll through these functions by
turning the pushbutton/rotary control element. The function
is selected by pressing the button.
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Inhaltsverzeichnis (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/Inhaltsverzeichnis @ 19\mod_1320649044386_15.docx @ 109653 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Safety instructions.................................................................................................................................................... 9
Dimensional drawings ............................................................................................................................................ 10
Frame-free variety .................................................................................................................................................. 11
Combinations as desired ....................................................................................................................................... 12
Not just any KNX control element .......................................................................................................................... 13
The right bus coupler ............................................................................................................................................. 15
Easy to mount ........................................................................................................................................................ 16
Room temperature controller operation ................................................................................................................. 17
8.1
Room thermostat with display ............................................................................................................... 17
8.1.1
Standard view ....................................................................................................................................... 17
8.1.2
Set values ............................................................................................................................................. 17
8.2
Operating modes................................................................................................................................... 18
Room temperature controller operation (only 6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]).. 19
9.1
Busch-priOn 8.89 cm display 6344-xxx-101-500 .................................................................................. 19
9.1.1
Operating process ................................................................................................................................. 19
9.1.2
Operating functions ............................................................................................................................... 20
9.1.3
Info line ................................................................................................................................................. 21
9.1.4
Busch-priOn® top end strip with display 6351/08-825-500 ................................................................... 21
9.2
Combination with 3gang control element 6342-xxx-101-500 ................................................................ 22
9.2.1
Operating process ................................................................................................................................. 22
9.3
Combination with 1gang rotary control element 6341-xxx-101-500 ...................................................... 23
9.3.1
Operating process ................................................................................................................................. 23
9.3.2
Operating modes................................................................................................................................... 24
Planner support for RTC ........................................................................................................................................ 25
10.1
Operating modes................................................................................................................................... 25
10.1.1
Operating mode switchover, 1 bit .......................................................................................................... 25
10.1.2
Operating mode switchover, 1 byte ....................................................................................................... 26
10.1.3
Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................. 27
10.1.4
External temperature sensor ................................................................................................................. 27
10.1.5
Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................ 28
10.2
Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 28
10.2.1
2-point controller ................................................................................................................................... 29
10.2.2
Continuous controller ............................................................................................................................ 29
10.2.3
PWM controller ..................................................................................................................................... 30
10.2.4
Fan coil ................................................................................................................................................. 30
10.2.5
Control parameter for PWM controller and continuous controller (Fan coil) .......................................... 30
10.2.6
Two-stage heating / cooling .................................................................................................................. 31
10.3
Set values ............................................................................................................................................. 31
10.3.1
Dependent setpoints ............................................................................................................................. 31
10.3.2
Individual setpoints................................................................................................................................ 32
10.3.3
Minimum distance ................................................................................................................................. 32
10.4
Fan coil, general ................................................................................................................................... 33
10.5
Compensation ....................................................................................................................................... 34
10.5.1
Summer compensation ......................................................................................................................... 34
10.5.2
Winter compensation ............................................................................................................................ 35
Description of application ....................................................................................................................................... 36
11.1
Switching, rocker total ........................................................................................................................... 36
11.2
Switching, rocker left/right ..................................................................................................................... 36
11.3
Dimming, rocker total ............................................................................................................................ 36
11.4
Dimming, rocker left/right ...................................................................................................................... 37
11.5
Blind, rocker total .................................................................................................................................. 37
2 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
12
11.6
Blind, rocker left/right ............................................................................................................................ 37
11.7
Value sender, rocker total ..................................................................................................................... 38
11.8
Value sender, rocker left/right ............................................................................................................... 38
11.9
Value sender, 2 objects, rocker left/right ............................................................................................... 39
11.10
Value dimming sensor, rocker total ....................................................................................................... 39
11.11
Light scene extension unit with memory function .................................................................................. 40
11.12
Step switch, rocker total ........................................................................................................................ 40
11.13
Step switch, rocker left/right .................................................................................................................. 41
11.14
Multiple operation, rocker left/right ........................................................................................................ 41
11.15
Short/long operation, rocker left/right .................................................................................................... 43
11.16
Setting RTC operation mode ................................................................................................................. 43
11.17
Media control, CD player ....................................................................................................................... 44
11.18
Media control, radio............................................................................................................................... 45
11.19
Media control, video player ................................................................................................................... 46
11.20
Short-time timer..................................................................................................................................... 46
11.21
Weekly timer ......................................................................................................................................... 47
11.22
Alarm clock ........................................................................................................................................... 48
11.23
Messages .............................................................................................................................................. 49
11.24
Title text ................................................................................................................................................ 49
11.25
Unit blockage ........................................................................................................................................ 50
11.26
RTC settings ......................................................................................................................................... 50
11.27
Sequence actuator settings ................................................................................................................... 50
11.28
Shutting actuator ................................................................................................................................... 51
11.29
Switch actuator application ................................................................................................................... 51
11.30
Movement detector ............................................................................................................................... 52
11.31
LED function ......................................................................................................................................... 54
11.32
Alarm function ....................................................................................................................................... 54
11.33
Light scene memory function ................................................................................................................ 54
11.34
Delay ..................................................................................................................................................... 55
11.35
Staircase lighting ................................................................................................................................... 56
11.36
Light scene actuator .............................................................................................................................. 57
11.37
Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 57
11.38
Preset .................................................................................................................................................... 58
11.39
Cyclic telegram...................................................................................................................................... 58
11.40
Flashing ................................................................................................................................................ 59
11.41
Logic ..................................................................................................................................................... 59
11.42
Gate ...................................................................................................................................................... 60
11.43
Min/Max value transducer ..................................................................................................................... 61
11.44
Threshold value / hysteresis ................................................................................................................. 62
11.45
PWM inverter ........................................................................................................................................ 62
11.46
Priority ................................................................................................................................................... 63
Description of applications/parameters for room temperature control 6351/08-825 + 6344-101
[from update version 0.1.6.0 .................................................................................................................................. 64
12.1
Application "RTC".................................................................................................................................. 64
12.1.1
General - Device function ...................................................................................................................... 64
12.1.2
General - Control function ..................................................................................................................... 64
12.1.3
General - Operating mode after reset ................................................................................................... 65
12.1.4
General - Additional functions ............................................................................................................... 65
12.1.5
General - Send cyclic "In operation" (min) ............................................................................................ 66
12.1.6
Heating control ...................................................................................................................................... 66
12.1.7
Heating control - Control value type ...................................................................................................... 66
12.1.8
Heating control - Heating type ............................................................................................................... 67
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 3
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
12.1.9
12.1.10
12.1.11
12.1.12
12.1.13
12.1.14
12.1.15
12.1.16
12.1.17
12.1.18
12.1.19
12.1.20
12.1.21
12.1.22
12.1.23
12.1.24
12.1.25
12.1.26
12.1.27
12.1.28
12.1.29
12.1.30
12.1.31
12.1.32
12.1.33
12.1.34
12.1.35
12.1.36
12.1.37
12.1.38
12.1.39
12.1.40
12.1.41
12.1.42
12.1.43
12.1.44
12.1.45
12.1.46
12.1.47
12.1.48
12.1.49
12.1.50
12.1.51
12.1.52
12.1.53
12.1.54
12.1.55
12.1.56
12.1.57
12.1.58
12.1.59
12.1.60
Heating control - P-component (x 0.1°C) .............................................................................................. 67
Heating control - I-component (min.) ..................................................................................................... 68
Heating control - Extended settings ...................................................................................................... 68
Basic stage heating ............................................................................................................................... 68
Basic stage heating - Status object heating .......................................................................................... 68
Basic stage heating - Mode of the control value ................................................................................... 68
Basic stage heating - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C) ............................................................................................ 69
Basic stage heating - Control value difference for sending of heating control value ............................. 69
Basic stage heating - Cyclic sending of the control value (min) ............................................................ 69
Basic stage heating - PWM cycle heating (min) .................................................................................... 70
Basic stage heating - Maximum control value (0 - 255) ........................................................................ 70
Basic stage heating - Minimum control value for basic load (0 to 255) ................................................. 70
Control of additional heating stage ........................................................................................................ 70
Control of additional heating stage - Control value type ........................................................................ 71
Control of additional heating stage - Additional heating type ................................................................ 72
Control of additional heating stage - P-component (x 0.1°C) ................................................................ 72
Control of additional heating stage - P-component (min) ...................................................................... 73
Control of additional heating stage - Temperature difference to basic stage (x 0.1°C) ......................... 73
Control of additional heating stage - Extended settings ........................................................................ 73
Additional heating stage ........................................................................................................................ 73
Additional heating stage - Mode of the control value............................................................................. 73
Additional heating stage - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C) ..................................................................................... 74
Additional heating stage - Control value difference for sending of heating control value ...................... 74
Additional heating stage - Cyclic sending of the control value (min) ..................................................... 75
Additional heating stage - Minimum control value for basic load (0 - 255) ............................................ 75
Cooling control ...................................................................................................................................... 76
Cooling control - Control value type ...................................................................................................... 76
Cooling control - Cooling type ............................................................................................................... 77
Cooling control - P-component (x 0.1°C)............................................................................................... 77
Cooling control - I-component (min.) ..................................................................................................... 77
Cooling control - Extended settings ...................................................................................................... 78
Basic stage cooling ............................................................................................................................... 78
Basic stage cooling - Status object cooling ........................................................................................... 78
Basic stage cooling - Mode of the control value .................................................................................... 78
Basic stage cooling - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C) ............................................................................................ 79
Basic stage cooling - Cyclic sending of the control value (min) ............................................................. 79
Basic stage cooling ............................................................................................................................... 80
Basic stage cooling - Maximum control value (0 - 255) ......................................................................... 80
Basic stage cooling - Minimum control value for basic load (0 to 255) .................................................. 80
Control of additional cooling stage ........................................................................................................ 81
Control of additional cooling stage - Cooling type ................................................................................. 82
Control of additional cooling stage - P-component (x 0.1°C)................................................................. 82
Control of additional cooling stage - P-component (min)....................................................................... 82
Control of additional cooling stage - Extended settings......................................................................... 83
Additional cooling stage ........................................................................................................................ 83
Additional cooling stage - Mode of the control value ............................................................................. 83
Additional cooling stage - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C) ..................................................................................... 83
Additional cooling stage - Control value difference for sending of cooling control value ....................... 84
Additional cooling stage - Cyclic sending of the control value (min) ...................................................... 84
Additional cooling stage - Maximum control value (0 - 255) .................................................................. 84
Additional cooling stage - Minimum control value for basic load (0 - 255)............................................. 85
Settings of basic load ............................................................................................................................ 85
4 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
12.1.61
12.1.62
12.1.63
12.1.64
12.1.65
12.1.66
12.1.67
12.1.68
12.1.69
12.1.70
12.1.71
12.1.72
12.1.73
12.1.74
12.1.75
12.1.76
12.1.77
12.1.78
12.1.79
12.1.80
12.1.81
12.1.82
12.1.83
12.1.84
12.1.85
12.1.86
12.1.87
12.1.88
12.1.89
12.1.90
12.1.91
12.1.92
12.1.93
12.1.94
12.1.95
12.1.96
12.1.97
12.1.98
12.1.99
12.1.100
12.1.101
12.1.102
12.1.103
12.1.104
12.1.105
12.1.106
12.1.107
12.1.108
12.1.109
12.1.110
12.1.111
12.1.112
Settings of basic load - Minimum control value for basic load > 0 ......................................................... 85
Combined heating and cooling modes .................................................................................................. 85
Combined heating and cooling modes - Switchover of heating/cooling ................................................ 86
Combined heating and cooling modes - Operating mode after reset .................................................... 86
Combined heating and cooling modes - Heating/cooling control value output ...................................... 86
Combined heating and cooling modes - Additional heating/cooling stage control value output ............ 87
Setpoint settings.................................................................................................................................... 87
Setpoint settings - Setpoint for heating comfort = setpoint for cooling comfort...................................... 87
Setpoint settings - Hysteresis for switchover heating/cooling (x 0.1°C)................................................. 88
Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for heating and cooling comfort (°C)...................................... 88
Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for heating comfort (°C) ......................................................... 88
Setpoint settings - Reduction for standby heating (°C).......................................................................... 88
Setpoint settings - Reduction for ECO heating (°C) .............................................................................. 89
Setpoint settings - Set-point temperature for frost protection (°C) ......................................................... 89
Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for cooling comfort (°C) ......................................................... 89
Setpoint settings - Increase for standby cooling (°C) ............................................................................ 89
Setpoint settings - Increase for ECO cooling (°C) ................................................................................. 90
Setpoint settings - Set-point temperature for heat protection (°C) ......................................................... 90
Setpoint settings - Display indicates...................................................................................................... 90
Setpoint settings - Display indicates...................................................................................................... 90
Setpoint settings - Send current setpoint .............................................................................................. 91
Setpoint settings - Cyclic sending of the current set-point temperature (min) ....................................... 91
Setpoint adjustment .............................................................................................................................. 91
Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual increase during heating mode (0 - 15°C) ............................ 91
Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual reduction during heating mode (0 - 15°C) ........................... 91
Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual increase during cooling mode (0 - 15°C)............................. 92
Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual reduction during cooling mode (0 - 15°C) ........................... 92
Setpoint adjustment - Resetting of the manual adjustment for receipt of a basic setpoint .................... 92
Setpoint adjustment - Resetting the manual adjustment for change of operating mode ....................... 93
Setpoint adjustment - Resetting the manual adjustment via object ....................................................... 93
Setpoint adjustment - Permanent storage of on-site operation ............................................................. 93
Temperature reading - Inputs of temperature reading........................................................................... 93
Temperature reading - Inputs of weighted temperature reading ........................................................... 94
Temperature reading - Weighting of internal measurement (0 to 100%)............................................... 94
Temperature reading - Weighting of external measurement (0 to 100%) .............................................. 94
Temperature reading - Weighting of external measurement 2 (0 to 100%) ........................................... 94
Temperature reading - Cyclic sending of the actual temperature (min)................................................. 95
Temperature reading - Difference of value for sending the actual temperature (x 0.1°C) ..................... 95
Temperature reading - Adjustment value for internal temperature measurement (x 0.1°C) .................. 95
Temperature reading - Monitoring time for temperature reading (0 = no monitoring) (min)................... 95
Temperature reading — Operating mode for fault................................................................................. 96
Temperature reading - Control value for fault (0 - 255) ......................................................................... 96
Alarm functions ..................................................................................................................................... 96
Alarm functions - Condensate water alarm ........................................................................................... 96
Alarm functions — Dew point alarm ...................................................................................................... 97
Alarm functions - Frost alarm temperature for HVAC and RHCC status (°C) ........................................ 97
Alarm functions - Heat alarm temperature for RHCC status (°C) .......................................................... 97
Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels ...................................................................................................... 97
Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels Number of fan speed levels ......................................................... 97
Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Format of the level output .......................................................... 98
Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Level output ............................................................................... 98
Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Lowest manually adjustable level............................................... 98
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 5
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
12.1.113
12.1.114
12.1.115
12.1.116
12.1.117
12.1.118
12.1.119
12.1.120
12.1.121
12.1.122
12.1.123
12.1.124
12.1.125
Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Level status evaluation .............................................................. 99
Fan coil settings heating ....................................................................................................................... 99
Fan coil settings for heating - Speed level 1 to 5 up to control value (0 to 255) heating ....................... 99
Fan coil settings for heating - Fan speed level limit heating for eco mode ............................................ 99
Fan coil settings for heating - Maximum speed level heating for eco mode ........................................ 100
Fan coil settings for cooling................................................................................................................. 100
Fan coil settings for cooling - Speed level 1 to 5 up to control value (0 to 255) cooling ...................... 100
Fan coil settings for cooling - Fan speed level limit cooling for eco mode ........................................... 100
Fan coil settings for cooling - Maximum fan speed level cooling for eco mode ................................... 100
Summer compensation ....................................................................................................................... 101
Summer compensation - Summer compensation ............................................................................... 101
Summer compensation - (Lower) Starting temperature for summer compensation (°C) ..................... 102
Summer compensation - Offset of the set-point temperature for the entry into
summer compensation (x 0.1°C) ......................................................................................................... 102
12.1.126 Summer compensation - (Upper) exit temperature for summer compensation (°C) ........................... 102
12.1.127 Summer compensation - Offset of the set-point temperature for the exit from
summer compensation (x 0.1°C) ......................................................................................................... 103
12.2
Communication objects - RTC ............................................................................................................ 104
12.2.1
Heating control value .......................................................................................................................... 104
12.2.2
Additional heating stage ...................................................................................................................... 104
12.2.3
Cooling control value........................................................................................................................... 104
12.2.4
Additional cooling stage ...................................................................................................................... 105
12.2.5
Control On/Off ..................................................................................................................................... 105
12.2.6
Actual temperature .............................................................................................................................. 106
12.2.7
External actual temperature ................................................................................................................ 106
12.2.8
External actual temperature 2 ............................................................................................................. 106
12.2.9
Fault, actual temperature .................................................................................................................... 107
12.2.10 Local actual temperature..................................................................................................................... 107
12.2.11 Current setpoint .................................................................................................................................. 108
12.2.12 Operating mode .................................................................................................................................. 108
12.2.13 Superimposed operating mode ........................................................................................................... 109
12.2.14 Window contact ................................................................................................................................... 109
12.2.15 Presence detector ............................................................................................................................... 110
12.2.16 Heating status ..................................................................................................................................... 110
12.2.17 Cooling status ..................................................................................................................................... 110
12.2.18 Basic load ........................................................................................................................................... 111
12.2.19 Switchover heating/cooling ................................................................................................................. 111
12.2.20 Fan coil manual ................................................................................................................................... 112
12.2.21 Fan coil step ........................................................................................................................................ 112
12.2.22 Fan coil step status ............................................................................................................................. 113
12.2.23 Fan speed level 1 ................................................................................................................................ 113
12.2.24 Fan speed level 2 ................................................................................................................................ 113
12.2.25 Fan speed level 3 ................................................................................................................................ 113
12.2.26 Fan speed level 4 ................................................................................................................................ 113
12.2.27 Fan speed level 5 ................................................................................................................................ 114
12.2.28 Basic setpoint ...................................................................................................................................... 114
12.2.29 Resetting manual setpoints ................................................................................................................. 114
12.2.30 Dew point alarm .................................................................................................................................. 114
12.2.31 Condensate water alarm ..................................................................................................................... 115
12.2.32 Outside temperature for summer compensation ................................................................................. 115
12.2.33 Summer compensation active ............................................................................................................. 116
12.2.34 Setpoint reached ................................................................................................................................. 116
6 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
12.2.35
12.2.36
12.2.37
12.2.38
12.2.39
12.2.40
12.2.41
12.2.42
12.2.43
12.2.44
12.2.45
12.2.46
12.2.47
Fahrenheit ........................................................................................................................................... 116
Display backlighting ............................................................................................................................ 117
On/Off request..................................................................................................................................... 117
Setpoint display ................................................................................................................................... 117
Request setpoint ................................................................................................................................. 117
Confirm setpoint .................................................................................................................................. 117
Heating/cooling request ...................................................................................................................... 118
Request fan speed level manual ......................................................................................................... 118
Request fan speed level ...................................................................................................................... 118
Confirm fan speed level ...................................................................................................................... 118
Controller status RHCC ....................................................................................................................... 119
Controller status HVAC ....................................................................................................................... 119
Commissioned .................................................................................................................................... 119
=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke TOC ===
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 7
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 6 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Steuermodule - Online-Dokumentation (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
8 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 7.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/S - TSicherheitshinweise @ 9\mod_1269243781484_15.docx @ 52309 @ 1 @ 1
1
Safety instructions
Pos: 7.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1
Pos: 7.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Sicherheitshinweise/Sicherheitshinweise @ 9\mod_1269245364203_15.docx @ 52365 @ @ 1
Work on the 230 V power supply system must
only be performed by specialist staff.
Disconnect the mains power supply prior to
mounting and/or disassembly!
Failure to observe the installation and
operating instructions may result in fire or
other hazards.
Pos: 7.4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Spaltenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898761421_0.docx @ 52154 @ @ 1
Pos: 7.5 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Sicherheitshinweise/Haftungsausschluss @ 16\mod_1292413036321_15.docx @ 97864 @ @ 1
Disclaimer
The content of this printed material has been
checked for compliance with hardware and
software. However, no liability can be assumed
for any deviations that may still occur. Any
necessary corrections will be implemented in
future versions of this manual.
Please advise us of any suggestions
concerning the manual's improvement you may
have.
Pos: 7.6 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1
Pos: 8 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 9
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 9.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/M - OMaßzeichnungen @ 9\mod_1269243888140_15.docx @ 52313 @ 1 @ 1
2
Dimensional drawings
Pos: 9.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1
Pos: 9.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Maßzeichnungen/Variante - ABB/Maßzeichnungen_Best_Nr - ABB @ 15\mod_1289220462033_15.docx @ 96904 @ @ 1
Flush-type 8,9 cm (3,5") display with control element,
Busch-priOn®
Support frame for Busch-priOn® 6346/12-101-500
Flush-type control element, Busch-priOn®
6340-xxx-101-500
Flush-type rotary control element,
6341-xxx-101-500
Flush-type movement detector Busch-priOn®
6345-xxx-101-500
Pos: 9.4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1
71
107
Pos: 10 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
10 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
31
Pos: 11.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/P - RRahmenlose Vielfalt @ 9\mod_1269243889687_15.docx @ 52318 @ 1 @ 1
3
Frame-free variety
Pos: 11.2 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Rahmenlose Vielfalt/Rahmenlose Vielfalt @ 9\mod_1269245480843_15.docx @ 52373 @ @ 1
It is not merely individuality which characterises Busch-priOn® during programming of the individual buttons:
Also the assembly arrangement of the Busch-priOn® combinations are highly flexible. For Busch-priOn is not bound to
frames -- instead, up to 3 individual elements are fixed to a support frame and, at the end, provided with end strips above
and below. There are four choices of finish for the control elements: studio white, glass white, glass black and stainless
steel. Most of the end strips are also available in these colour versions. For the display (style sheets), there are three
choices: black, blue and silver.
Modular design
End strips
These not only have a beautiful shape -- they optionally
contain a temperature sensor for room temperature
control, an infrared interface for the remote control and
a proximity sensor for activating the display or LED of
the control elements when somebody approaches. This
IR / proximity sensor version is only available in glass
black and not in the other colours. Additional
information about controlling the room temperature with
Busch-priOn® is contained in the brochure on heating,
ventilation and air conditioning.
Pos: 12 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 11
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 13.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/G - LKombinationen nach Wunsch @ 9\mod_1269243898187_15.docx @ 52323 @ 1 @ 1
4
Combinations as desired
Pos: 13.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Kombinationen nach Wunsch/Variante - ABBKombinationen nach Wunsch_Best_Nr - ABB @ 41\mod_1422287700530_15.docx @ 314949 @ @ 1
The control elements and end strips can be freely combined in their colours and functions for Busch-priOn. Up to 3gang
combinations are possible, whereby a single bus coupler will suffice.
Article number
Support frame
1gang
2gang
3gang
Top end strip IR / proximity sensor
6350-825-101-500
●
●
●
Top end strip with display, IR / proximity sensor
6351-825-101-500
●
●
●
Top end strip standard
6348-101-500
●
●
●
Top end strip with display, IR / proximity sensor
6351/08-825-500
●
●
●
1gang control element
6340-101-500
●
●
●
3gang control element
6342-101-500
●
●
●
1gang rotary control element
6341-101-500
●
●
●
Movement detector
6345-101-500
●
●
●
8.9 cm display including control element
6344-101-500
-
●
●
Bottom end strip, temperature
6352-101-500
●
●
●
Bottom end strip standard
6349-101-500
●
●
●
Bus coupler
6120/12-500
●
-
-
Power bus coupler and power adaptor, MDRC
6120/13-500 + 6358-500
●
●
●
Network coupler
6920/12
●
-
-
Power mains coupler
6920/13
●
●
●
Flush-mounted switch actuator
6354-500
-
●
●
Flush-mounted dimming actuator, 1gang
6355-500
-
●
●
Flush-mounted blind / switch actuator
6356-500
-
●
●
Flush-mounted blind / switch actuator
6920/40
●
●
-
Pos: 11 /Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.doc @ 52148 @
Pos: 15.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/G - LKein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement @ 9\mod_1269243899796_15.docx @ 52328 @ 1 @ 1
12 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
5
Not just any KNX control element
Pos: 15.2 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement - Text @ 9\mod_1269426042218_15.docx @ 52740 @ @ 1
Each of the buttons of the Busch-priOn® can be programmed individually, as is usually the case with KNX. The applications
range from switching, dimming and blinds on through to scenes. Logic functions are also possible. The use of the display
makes additional functions available. Weekly timers, messages and multimedia applications can be integrated here, for
example. Also additional applications can be implemented with the assigning of internal group addresses. The user menu
can be configured in 19 languages.
Pos: 15.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement - Tabelle - Applikationen @ 15\mod_1289221025466_15.docx @ 96936 @ @ 1
Applications
Application
Control element
Rotary control
8.9 cm (3,5") TFT
Movement
element
display
detector
Page number
with control element
Switching, rocker total
●
-
-
-
Switching, rocker left/right
●
-
●
-
Page 36
Page 36
Dimming, rocker total
●
-
-
-
Page 36
Dimming, rocker left/right
●
●
●
-
Page 37
Blind, rocker total
●
-
-
-
Page 37
Blind, rocker left/right
●
●
●
-
Page 37
Value sender, rocker total
●
-
-
-
Page 38
Value sender, rocker left/right
●
●
●
-
Page 38
Value sender, 2 objects, rocker left/right
●
-
-
-
Page 39
Value dimming sensor, rocker total
●
-
●
-
Page 39
Light scene extension unit with memory
●
-
●
-
Page 40
Level switch, rocker total
●
-
-
-
Page 40
Level switch, rocker left/right
●
-
-
-
Page 41
Multiple actuation, rocker left/right
●
-
-
-
Page 41
Short/long operation, rocker left/right
●
-
-
-
Page 43
Setting RTC operation mode
●
-
●
-
Page 43
Media control, CD player
-
-
●
-
Page 44
function
Media control, radio
-
-
●
-
Page 45
Media control, video player
-
-
●
-
Page 46
Short-time timer
-
-
●
-
Page 46
Weekly timer
-
-
●
-
Page 47
Alarm clock
-
-
●
-
Page 48
Messages
-
-
●
-
Page 49
Title text
-
-
●
-
Page 49
Unit blockage
-
-
●
-
Page 50
RTC settings
-
-
●1
-
Page 50
Sequence actuator settings
-
-
●
-
Page 50
Venetian blind application
●
●
●2
-
Page 51
Switch actuator application
●
●
●
-
Page 51
Movement detector
-
-
-
●
Page 52
LED functionality
●
●
●
-
Page 54
Alarm function
●
●
-
-
Page 54
Storage function Light scenes
●
●
●
-
Page 54
1
2
Only in connection with a bottom end strip "temperature sensor" or another external sensor. Busch- priOn ® has 1 internal room thermostat.
Only in connection with flush-type blind / 2-gang actuator 6356.
Pos: 15.4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 13
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 15.5 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement - Tabelle - Allg. Funktionen @ 15\mod_1289904254518_15.docx @ 97280 @ @ 1
General functions
Function
Large-area control
Rotary control
8.9 cm (3,5") TFT
Movement
element
element
display with control
detector
Page number
element
Delay
●
●
●
●
Staircase lighting
●
●
●
●
Page 55
Page 56
Light scene actuator settings
●
●
●
●
Page 57
Sequence
●
●
●
●
Page 57
Preset
●
●
●
●
Page 58
Cyclic telegram
●
●
●
●
Page 58
Flahing
●
●
●
●
Page 59
Logic
●
●
●
●
Page 59
Gate
●
●
●
●
Page 60
Min/Max value transducer
●
●
●
●
Page 61
Threshold value / hysteresis
●
●
●
●
Page 62
PWM inverter
●
●
●
●
Page 62
Priority
●
●
●
●
Page 62
Pos: 15.6 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Kein gewöhnliches KNX-BedienelementKein gewöhnliches KNX-Bedienelement - Abbildung 1/2fach @ 41\mod_1422276842090_15.docx @ 314917 @ @ 1
Busch-priOn®
Rotary control element
glass black
Busch-priOn®
3gang control element,
glass black
Busch-priOn®
Top end strip
+ 3gang control element,
glass black
Busch-priOn®
Top end strip
Rotary control element
glass black
Busch-priOn®
2gang combination,
glass black
Busch-priOn® Watchdog 180 flush-mounted,
glass black
Pos: 17.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/A - FDer richtige Ankoppler @ 9\mod_1269243900921_15.docx @ 52333 @ 1 @ 1
14 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn® is ideally combinable with
the carat® switch range. These switches
distinguish themselves through their
uniformly designed surfaces.
Busch-priOn®
1gang control element,
glass black
6
The right bus coupler
Pos: 17.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1
Pos: 17.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Der richtige Ankoppler/Variante - ABB/Der richtige Ankoppler - Tabelle+Text_Best_Nr - ABB @ 16\mod_1291294382201_15.docx @ 97635 @ @ 1
Maximum number of Busch-priOn® devices per TP line
Number of
Total number of
Total number of TP-
display
combinations 1
Power bus couplers
6120/13 per line
combinations per
line
1
0
0 + 60
60
1
1 + 59
60
2
2 + 58
60
3
3 + 57
60
4
4 + 56
60
5
5 + 55
60
6
6 + 54
60
7
7 + 53
60
8
8 + 52
60
9
9 + 51
60
10
10 + 45
55
11
11 + 37
48
12
12 + 30
42
13
13 + 22
35
14
14 + 15
29
15
15 + 7
22
16
16 + 0
16
Only one bus coupler is mounted behind every BuschpriOn® combination. One standard bus coupler is adequate
for one 1-gang support frame. With the use of the 2-gang
carrier frame the more powerful power bus coupler must be
used.
The twisted pair version requires an external power pack for
this purpose. The table to the left describes the
corresponding device combinations.
Pos: 17.4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1
Composed of display combinations plus 1- to 3-gang combinations without
display with end strips
Pos: 17.5 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Der richtige Ankoppler/Variante - ABB-STOTZ/Der richtige Ankoppler - Abbildung - ABB + ABB-STOTZ @ 16\mod_1291294546873_15.docx @ 97651 @ @ 1
Standard bus coupler, TP
STN1
STN2
STN32
STN2
STN64
Power coupler, TP
Power supply KNX
STN1
24 V DC power supply
For the number of device
combinations see the table
above
Pos: 18 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 15
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 19.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/A - FEinfache Montage @ 9\mod_1269243901843_15.docx @ 52338 @ 1 @ 1
7
Easy to mount
Pos: 19.2 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Einfache Montage/Einfache Montage - Text @ 10\mod_1272614580478_15.docx @ 53803 @ @ 1
The carrier frame serves to hold and make contact with the individual control elements, the 8.9 cm (3,5”) TFT display, the
end strips and the flush-type bus coupler. The position of the control elements can be selected freely for multiple
combinations. A special strip must be mounted on top as well as below. Its material can be different to that of the module.
The support frame is mounted by screwing it to the flush-type bus coupler and, for multiple combinations, also to the wall.
Thanks to the anti-fingerprint surface, the stainless steel Busch-priOn® is easy to keep clean and maintains its sophisticated
surface finish even when it is in use. Glass surfaces and end strips match the carat® series.
Pos: 19.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Einfache Montage/Einfache Montage - Abbildung 3fach @ 9\mod_1269245658421_15.docx @ 52398 @ @ 1
Busch-priOn®
Glass black
Busch-priOn®
Studio white
Pos: 20 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
16 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Stainless steel
Busch-priOn®
Glass white
Pos: 21.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Überschriften (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/1. Ebene/A - F/Bedienung Raumtemperaturregler @ 41\mod_1422288448107_15.docx @ 314997 @ 1 @ 1
8
Room temperature controller operation
Pos: 21.2 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/Raumtemperaturregler-Display @ 13\mod_1286269387786_15.docx @ 91504 @ 2 @ 1
8.1
8.1.1
Room thermostat with display
Standard view
Pos: 21.3 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/3. Ebene/S - TStandardansicht @ 13\mod_1286269449786_15.docx @ 91512 @ 3 @ 1
Pos: 21.4 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1
Pos: 21.5 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Raumtemperaturregler/Standardansicht @ 13\mod_1286269136131_15.docx @ 91487 @ @ 1
Operating state
Operating mode
Actual or setpoint temperature
The display of the room thermostat shows either the current
room temperature or the setpoint for the temperature,
depending on the parameterization.
The current operating state is shown in the left area of the
display and the current operating mode in the right area.
Pos: 21.6 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1
Pos: 21.7 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/3. Ebene/S - TSollwerte @ 13\mod_1286269492130_15.docx @ 91520 @ 3 @ 1
8.1.2
Set values
Pos: 21.8 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1
Pos: 21.9 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Raumtemperaturregler/Sollwerte @ 13\mod_1286269283224_15.docx @ 91495 @ @ 1
Heating setpoint
Cooling setpoint
 Temperature  Next setpoint
 Temperature +
 Previous setpoint
 Comfort/Standby
 On/Off
 FanCoil-Steps
 Short press
 Long press
In the setting level, which is accessed by pressing the
additional key once, the setpoints for heating and/or cooling
can be adjusted.
The corresponding setpoints are located to the right of each
respective symbol for heating or cooling.
The value brightly highlighted can be changed.
The adjustment is made with the upper rocker of the control
element. A short press of the left side lowers the setpoint, a
short press of the right side raises the setpoint. With a long
press of the button the selection jumps to the next setpoint.
This one can now also be adjusted with a short press of the
button.
After an adjustable time, the display returns to the standard
view.
Pos: 21.10 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1
Pos: 21.11 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 17
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 21.12 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Betriebsarten @ 13\mod_1286276050737_15.docx @ 91535 @ 2 @ 1
8.2
Operating modes
Pos: 21.13 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel von ein- auf zweispaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898451593_0.docx @ 52140 @ @ 1
Pos: 21.14 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Raumtemperaturregler/ArchivBetriebsarten_zwei (2015-01-29 08:33:41) @ 13\mod_1286273939022_15.docx @ 91528 @ @ 1
Night setback: The temperature
can be reduced during the night.
This saves energy and makes the
night's rest comfortable. The heating
starts again automatically the next
morning to reach a comfortable
temperature for rising.
Standby: Standby mode lowers the
temperature below the value of
comfort mode. This saves energy
and does not cool down the room
even during an extended absence.
Comfort: Comfort mode regulates
the temperature to suit the
occupants while present. It can be
called up time-controlled or via a
telegram.
Frost protection: If parameterized,
frost protection will ensure that the
temperature does not drop below
the desired value. It is the lowest
setpoint.
Dew point: If an appropriate
telegram is received from a dew
point sensor, the room thermostat
will display the corresponding
symbol and cease cooling and
merely protect against the heat.
Heat protection: If parameterized,
heat protection will ensure that the
temperature does not exceed the
desired value. It is the highest
setpoint.
Alarm: The alarm can be freely
parameterized. For example, it can
occur when an external temperature
sensor no longer sends values.
Condensate: The operation of a fan
coil may cause condensate water,
which is collected in a container. If
the fan coil sends out a telegram
when the container is full, the
symbol for condensate mode is
displayed. The room thermostat
immediately switches into heat
protection mode.
On/Off: The room thermostat can be
turned on and off. When turned off,
this icon is shown in the display. The
divice operates in frost protection
mode.
Pos: 21.15 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Wechsel zwei- auf einspaltig ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898591406_0.docx @ 52144 @ @ 1
Pos: 22 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
18 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 23.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Raumtemperaturregler/Bedienung Raumtemperaturregler (nur 6351/08-825 + 6344-101 [ab 0.1.6.0]) -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422553842483_15.docx @ 331952 @ 12333323233 @ 1
9
Room temperature controller operation
(only 6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0])
9.1
Busch-priOn 8.89 cm display 6344-xxx-101-500
On the 8.89 cm display the current RTC will be replaced by the "Unified RTC".
The update to the new "Unified RTC" is carried out via the SD card slot of the device.
Note
The RTC functions are not compatible, which means that after the successful update the user must
re-parameterize and re-commission the RTC.
9.1.1
Operating process
The RTC is operated by calling up the desired controller from the list menu. The function is selected with the aid of the rotary
control element. Confirm by pressing the rotary control element.
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 19
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
9.1.2
Operating functions
The following functions are available to the user:
Display
21,0 °C
Function
Setpoint adjustment
To change the setpoint temperature, select it via the rotary control element and press it
to confirm the change.
The setpoint is adjusted by turning the rotary control element.
The adjustment is taken over by pressing the rotary control element.
The respective active mode (heating or cooling) is displayed by means of the
corresponding colour of blue or orange.
If the adjustment is carried out within the parameterized hysteresis heat/cooling, the
background is illuminated in white. If the threshold value is exceeded or drops below
the required value, this is displayed in the setpoint display via the colour orange
(heating) or blue (cooling).
ECO mode
If the ECO mode is selected, this can be activated by pressing on the rotary control
element. The display then changes to the ECO icon:
- The other functions of the RTC are blocked.
- Deactivation is carried out by again pressing or turning the rotary control element.
The screen switches back to the overall view.
OFF
Selection of function and confirmation by pressing the rotary control element. The
display then changes to the OFF icon:
1
Fan coil
Selection of the fan coil function and confirmation by pressing the rotary control
element.
- The fan speed level is adjusted manually by turning the rotary control element. The
4
adjustment is taken over by pressing the rotary control element.
Switchover
Selection of heating/cooling switchover. Optional switching between heating function
Heating/cooling
and cooling function is carried out by toggling the rotary control element. The
respective function is displayed via the corresponding icon.
Alarm functions
The alarm functions are indicated in grey in the centre via the corresponding icon in the display. Local operation is
blocked. The blockage is indicated via the blockage symbol at the top left in the window. It can be deactivated only
by cancelling the alarm.
Frost/heat protection
Condensation
Dew point
Comfort mode
Standby mode
ECO mode
20 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
9.1.3
Info line
The status of the internal controller is displayed at the left in the info line. The active operating mode, e.g. ECO mode, is
displayed via the icon in green. The heating or cooling status is shown via the respective colour blue or orange.
9.1.4
Busch-priOn® top end strip with display 6351/08-825-500
The end strip has been supplemented with the operation of the 1gang rotary control element 6341-xxx-101-500 for room
temperature controller operation. The 3gang control element and the 1gang rotary control element are selected via the
parameter setting. Starting from the 2gang support frame the 1gang rotary control element can be combined with other
models of the Busch-priOn product range. When using the 1gang support frame in connection with the rotary control
element, this combination only has one pure room temperature controller with rotary control and display. The bottom end
strip with temperature sensor is to be used for the local measurement of the temperature.
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 21
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
9.2
9.2.1
Combination with 3gang control element 6342-xxx-101-500
Operating process
Operation is carried out by pressing the additional key on the end strip. The device changes to the RTC adjustment level.
This change is indicated via an inverse display of the setpoint temperature (white with black numbers). The jump-back to the
first operating level occurs after a waiting period of 3 seconds or with a renewed press of the additional key.
The following functions are available to the user:
Display
21,0 °C
Function
Setpoint adjustment
ECO mode
The setpoint adjustment is made via the topmost rocker left/right.
If the ECO mode is selected, this can be activated by pressing on the rotary control
element. The display then changes to the ECO icon:
- The other functions of the RTC are blocked.
- Deactivation is carried out by again pressing or turning the rotary control element.
The screen switches back to the overall view.
OFF
The device is switched off by pressing the centre left rocker half. The function is
displayed in the centre of the display via the corresponding icon.
- It can only be deactivated with a renewed press of the left rocker.
1
Fan coil
The fan coil is operated via the bottom left rocker half. The active fan speed level is
displayed in the centre of the display. The adjustment is performed with a renewed
press of the rocker until the desired manual fan speed level is selected. It is displayed
4
Alarm functions
in the centre of the display and consists of the fan icon and the active fan speed level.
Switchover
The user can switch between heating and cooling via the bottom right rocker (if
heating/cooling
parameterized).
The alarm functions are indicated in the centre via the corresponding icon in the display. Local operation in the
RTC operating level is blocked. It can be deactivated only by cancelling the alarm.
Frost/heat protection
Condensation
Dew point
Comfort mode
Standby mode
ECO mode
22 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
9.3
9.3.1
Combination with 1gang rotary control element 6341-xxx-101-500
Operating process
The RTC is operated by calling up the desired controller from the list menu. The function is selected with the aid of the rotary
control element. Confirm by pressing the rotary control element.
The following functions are available to the user:
Display
21,0 °C
Function
Setpoint adjustment
The current setpoint is indicated directly. The setpoint is adjusted by turning the rotary
control element. The adjustment is taken over after a waiting period. The active mode
(heating or cooling) is displayed via the corresponding icon on the left next to the
setpoint, and the respective function is simultaneously displayed via the coloured
backlighting of the rotary control element.
If the adjustment is carried out within the parameterized hysteresis heat/cooling, the
background is illuminated in white. If the threshold value is exceeded or drops below
the required value, this is displayed on the rotary control element via the colour orange
(heating) or blue (cooling).
ECO mode
The ECO mode is activated by pressing the rotary control element. The display then
changes to the ECO icon:
- The other functions of the RTC are blocked.
- Deactivation is carried out by again pressing or turning the rotary control element.
The screen switches back to the overall view. The rotary control element is backlit in
green.
OFF
The function is selected by pressing and turning the rotary control element until the
desired OFF function is indicated in the display via the corresponding icon. The OFF
function is activated with a press. The display then changes to the OFF icon:
- The other functions of the RTC are blocked.
- The controller is switched on with a renewed press. The screen switches back to the
overall view.
- The rotary control element is backlit in white.
1
Fan coil
The function is selected by pressing and turning the rotary control element until the
desired fan coil function is indicated in the display via the corresponding icon. The fan
coil function is activated with a press. The active fan speed level is displayed in the
4
centre of the display. The adjustment is performed by turning the rotary control
element until the desired manual fan speed level is selected. It is displayed in the
centre of the display and consists of the fan icon and the active fan speed level:
- Confirm with a renewed press or after waiting period.
- The rotary control element is backlit in white.
Switchover
The function is selected by pressing and turning the rotary control element until the
heating/cooling
desired heating/cooling function is indicated in the display via the corresponding icon.
Optional switching between heating function and cooling function is carried out by
toggling the rotary control element. The respective function is displayed via the
corresponding icon.
- The rotary control element is backlit in white.
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 23
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Alarm functions
The alarm functions are indicated in the centre via the corresponding icon in the display. Local operation is
blocked. It can be deactivated only by cancelling the alarm.
Frost/heat protection
Condensation
Dew point
Comfort mode
Standby mode
ECO mode
9.3.2
Operating modes
Comfort: Comfort mode regulates the temperature to suit the occupants while present. It can be called up timecontrolled or via a telegram.
Standby: Standby mode lowers the temperature during presence below the level of comfort mode. This saves
energy. And the room does not cool down during an extended absence.
Dew point: If an appropriate telegram is received from a dew point sensor, the
room temperature controller will display the corresponding icon and cease cooling and merely protect against the
heat.
Alarm: The alarm can be freely parameterized. For example, it can occur when an external temperature sensor
no longer sends values.
On/Off: The room temperature controller can be switched on and off. This icon is displayed if the control is
switched off. The device operates in frost protection mode.
Frost protection: If parameterized, frost protection will ensure that the temperature does not drop below the
desired value. It is the lowest setpoint.
Heat protection: If parameterized, heat protection will ensure that the temperature does
not exceed the desired value. It is the highest setpoint.
Condensate: The operation of a fan coil may cause condensate, which is collected in a container. If the fan coil
sends out a telegram when the container is full, the icon for condensate mode is displayed. The room
temperature controller switches automatically into heat protection mode.
ECO: ECO mode lowers the temperature to the programmed setting. This saves energy. And the room does not
cool down during an extended absence.
Pos: 24 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Steuermodule - Online-Dokumentation (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
24 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 25.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/P - RPlanerunterstützung RTR @ 13\mod_1286265494848_15.docx @ 91464 @ 1 @ 1
10
Planner support for RTC
Pos: 25.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Betriebsarten_priON -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422517959532_15.docx @ 331048 @ 2 @ 1
10.1
Operating modes
The room temperature controller has four operating modes:
•
Frost protection mode (for heating): The room temperature control is inactive; heating is only carried out when the
temperature in the room drops to the point where the heating system could sustain damage through freezing.
Heat protection mode (for cooling): The room temperature control is inactive; cooling is only carried out when the
temperature has risen to the point where the heat in the room becomes unbearable.
•
Comfort mode (for heating and cooling): The setpoint for the room temperature is set to a value that makes the
temperature of the room comfortable during "normal use".
6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]:
Comfort mode is always active during manual operation (primary function).
•
Standby mode (for heating): The room temperature is reduced to the point where heating costs are saved (e.g. during
temporary absence), but can be quickly raised to comfort temperature again.
Standby mode (for cooling): The room temperature is only raised to the point where energy costs are saved (e.g. during
temporary absence), but can be quickly increased to comfort temperature again.
6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]:
Standby mode cannot be set on the device. It is can only be activated via the KNX bus. Indicated in the display via the
icon.
•
Night mode (for heating and cooling): Rooms are not used for longer periods during the night hours; the room
temperature is set to a comfortable night-time value and can be quickly raised again to the comfort setpoint in the
morning.
6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]:
Night mode has been replaced by ECO mode. This can also be activated locally. Indicated in the display via the icon.
A switchover between these operating modes can take place either by means of a switching telegram (parameter "Operating
mode switchover": "1 bit (3x)") or with 1-byte value telegrams (parameter "Operating mode switchover": "1 byte (2x)").
Pos: 25.3 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Betriebsartenumschaltung 1 Bit_priOn -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422520031724_15.docx @ 331100 @ 3 @ 1
10.1.1
Operating mode switchover, 1 bit
Frost/heat protection has the highest priority; i.e., switchover to a different mode cannot take place in this case. The
frost/heat protection must first be deactivated; by closing an open window, for example. Night mode has the next highest
priority, followed by comfort mode. If none of these three operating modes are active, the room temperature controller is in
standby mode.
6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]:
The 1-bit operating mode switchover is not available for this!
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 25
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 25.4 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Betriebsartenumschaltung 1 Byte @ 13\mod_1284559643038_15.docx @ 89981 @ 3 @ 1
10.1.2
Operating mode switchover, 1 byte
Two 1-byte communication objects are made available with operation mode switchover via 1 byte.
The two 1-byte communication objects have different behaviours for receipt of telegram. One object evaluates received
telegrams as "normal". This means, for example, if a comfort telegram is received, the room thermostat switches to comfort
mode. If a night telegram is received, the room thermostat switches to night mode. This object is controlled, for example, by
time switches.
The second object ("Operating mode switchover OMO") can "overwrite" the first. This means, for example, if a frost/heat
protection telegram is received, the room thermostat switches to frost or heat protection mode. If frost or heat protection is
reset after receipt of a new telegram, the room thermostat activates the mode that is pending on the "normal" object. As a
result, it is capable of memorising operating modes. This object is controlled, for example, by binary inputs that record
information from window contacts.
The following conditions apply for both 1-byte communication objects:
0 = Auto (only for "Operating mode switchover OMO“)
1 = Comfort
2 = Standby
3 = Night
4 = Frost/Heat protection
5 – 255 = not allowed
Pos: 25.5 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
26 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 25.6 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Überwachung Temperaturmessung @ 13\mod_1284635867620_15.docx @ 90018 @ 3 @ 1
10.1.3
Monitoring
The "Temperature measurement monitoring" parameter specifies whether the external temperature sensor and the outside
temperature are to be monitored. This means that the room thermostat has to receive at least one telegram with the current
temperature on the associated communication object within an adjustable time ("Monitoring time of external temperature"
and "Monitoring time of outside temperature").
If no telegram is received during monitoring time, the room thermostat assumes that the measuring sensor for the outside
temperature or external temperature is defective or no longer connected to the bus.
The room thermostat will then terminate its control and send a predefined control value ("Control value during temperature
measurement error") so that the room to be controlled does not overheat or cool down. This control value is sent out until the
room thermostat again receives a temperature telegram via the bus and reactivates the control.
Pos: 25.7 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Externe Temperaturerfassung @ 13\mod_1284635472980_15.docx @ 90010 @ 3 @ 1
10.1.4
External temperature sensor
In open-plan offices it can be difficult to control the temperature with only a single thermostat. That is why it would be
advantageous to divide the room into zones with an additional room thermostat.
To integrate the temperature value of the additional temperature sensor into the temperature control, the parameter "Room
temperature measurement" must be set on "Internal and external". The the temperature measured inside and outside can
then be additionally weighted. The setting for weighting depend on the local circumstances. If the room thermostat and the
additional measuring sensor are positioned equal distances from the heater, in the case of panel heaters, a 50% / 50%
setting should provide good control results.
Pos: 25.8 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 27
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 25.9 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Abgleich Temperaturmessung @ 13\mod_1284636694181_15.docx @ 90026 @ 3 @ 1
10.1.5
Adjustment
If the measured temperature is distorted, such as by the inherent heat of the bus coupler, an "Offset room temperature
measurement" can be set.
If additional external temperature recording has been activated and the measured value becomes distorted through the
influence of cold or heat, here, too, an offset can be entered.
Pos: 25.10 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Regler @ 13\mod_1284636897353_15.docx @ 90034 @ 2 @ 1
10.2
Controller
The room thermostat can be used exclusively for heating, exclusively for cooling or for heating and cooling.
If the room thermostat is to heat or cool, the switchover from heating to cooling or cooling to heating can occur automatically
by means of the room thermostat. The controller detects automatically whether a control value for heating or cooling is to be
sent out. If the automatic switchover is not required, the switchover between heating and cooling can take place by means of
an external, central control via the 1-bit object "Switchover heating/cooling". In this setup, the heat and cooling icons are
continuously displayed in the respective mode. The object is enabled via parameter "Switchover between heating/cooling".
The control value for heating and/or cooling can be sent out on a common communication object "Heating/cooling control
value" or on two individual communication objects "Heating control value" and "Cooling control value". If a common object is
used, it may be necessary to inform the actuator whether the control value is for heating or cooling. For this, a 1-bit
communication object "Switchover heating/cooling" can be enabled via parameter "Switchover between heating and cooling"
with setting "Automatic and sending". For activation of heating operating mode a "1" is sent to the bus, for activation of
cooling mode a "0".
A common communication object for heating and cooling is required to activate two two-pipe systems, i.e., the same pipeline
is used for heating and cooling. Two single communication objects are used for four-pipe systems. Heating and cooling each
have their own pipeline system.
Parameter "Number of output channels" specifies whether an object ("1 channel (two-pipe system) for heating and cooling")
or two objects ("2 channels (four-pipe system) for heating and cooling") are to be displayed.
Separate control types can be configured each for heating and cooling. One of the following control types can be selected:
•
2-point
•
PWM
•
Continuous
•
Fan coil
The individual control types are described in greater detail in the following.
Pos: 25.11 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
28 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 25.12 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Zweipunktregler @ 13\mod_1284639958501_15.docx @ 90042 @ 3 @ 1
10.2.1
2-point controller
A 2-point controller has two output states that alternate in dependence of the actual value. If the actual value is above the
parameterised setpoint, control value "0" is sent on the bus. If the actual value is below the parameterised setpoint, control
value "1" is sent.
A 2-point controller should be used when the control value is to alternate only between the two states ON and OFF, such as
an electrothermal valve that is connected to a switch actuator, for example. A 2-point controller can quickly correct control
variations in case of large changes in the control variable, but never comes to rest.
To avoid rapid oscillations of the output states, the 2-point controllers always have a built-in hysteresis that varies around
the setpoint. The hysteresis can have different size parameters. For example, if the setpoint during heating mode is 21 °C
and the hysteresis is 1.0 K, the controller switches on when the value falls below 20.5 °C and switches off again when
exceeding 21.5 °C. The "Hyteresis" parameter to be set, on the one hand responds to how quickly the heating can heat the
room or how quickly the air-conditioning cools the room, and on the other hand to the desired temperature of the people in
the room. The hysteresis should not be set too small, otherwise the switching actuator will constantly open and close. The
hysteresis should also not be set too large, otherwise the temperature fluctuations in the room will be too large.
Pos: 25.13 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Stetigregler @ 13\mod_1284706827607_15.docx @ 90054 @ 3 @ 1
10.2.2
Continuous controller
A continuous controller has a continuously changing control value which can accept values between 0 and 100%. For the
KNX this control value signal is converted to a 1-byte value, which means that control value 0% corresponds to value "0" and
control value 100% to value "255".
Continuous controllers with a 1-byte control value, for example, can be used to activate electromotive actuating drives. They
translate the value received directly into the valve position via an installed motor. This results in optimum control.
The 1-byte control value of a continuous controller can also be sent to KNX heating actuators which convert the 1-byte signal
into a PWM size. This allows electrothermal valves to be activated. Here it is practical to limit the dynamic range since
electrothermal valves require time to open and close. This takes place via parameters "Minimum control value" or "Maximum
control value". If, for example, a maximum control value of 80% is specified, the control will always automatically send the
value 255 when the control value of 204 has been exceeded.
To protect the bus from unnecessary loads the change of the control value that is permitted to be sent to the bus can be set.
The setting is in percent. The control value sent, unless it has changed, is specified by means of a cycle time. The cycle time
selected should not be too small (e.g. every 10 min.).
Pos: 25.14 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 29
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 25.15 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/PWM-Regler @ 13\mod_1284713045044_15.docx @ 90062 @ 3 @ 1
10.2.3
PWM controller
The PWM controller has the same continuous control as the continuous controller. The difference is that with a PWM
controller the 1-byte control value (0...255) is converted into an On/OFF switching relationship (0 and 1). If, for example, a
control value of 70% is to be issued, at a pre-set cycle time of 10 minutes the switch-on time will be 7 minutes and the
switch-off time 3 minutes.
This transfers the advantages of the continuous control (control at the desired setpoint, no overshooting) to drives which are
designed only for On/Off switching signals, such as electrothermal drives.
To optimise the controlling characteristics of the heating/cooling system, the "PWM control value cycle time" can be set. To
set a practical cycle time, the type of heating or cooling as well as the actuating drive used should be taken into
consideration. The following recommendations can be used:
•
Electrothermal actuating drive
To fully open an electrothermal control valve takes approximately 2-3 minutes. That is why a cycle time of less than 15
minutes is not practical.
•
Floor heating
The time constant of floor heating is rather large. That is why a cycle time of 20 minutes is sufficient.
•
Hot water heating
Her electrothermal drives are generally used. A cycle time of 15 minutes will produce excellent control results.
•
Electro-convector heating
Cycle times of between 10 and 15 minutes are recommended, depending on the electric heating system and the spatial
circumstances.
Pos: 25.16 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Fan Coil @ 13\mod_1284715124126_15.docx @ 90070 @ 3 @ 1
10.2.4
Fan coil
With the selection of fan coil for "Control types" the control value output takes place in the same way as described under
Continuous control.
With 'fan coil' there is the additional option of activating fan stages via a 1-byte or three 1-bit communication objects.
The added connection of the fan stages heats or cools the room correspondingly faster.
Which fan stage is to be active at which control value is specified on a separate tab "Fan coil heating" or "Fan coil cooling".
Here it should be ensured that threshold value stage 1 must always be smaller than threshold value stage 2, which in turn
must be smaller than threshold value stage 3.
Pos: 25.17 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Regelparameter @ 13\mod_1284716229894_15.docx @ 90078 @ 3 @ 1
10.2.5
Control parameter for PWM controller and continuous controller (Fan coil)
For continuous control behaviour and for a switching PWM controller, the preset control parameters can be used via the
installation type of the heating or cooling system. If different control parameters are required, they should be set individually
via user parameterization. User parameterization should only be used by persons with adequate experience in control
technology.
The setting "User parameterization" can be used to set the "Proportional range (Xp)" and the "Readjust time (Tn". The
proportional range lies below and above the preset setpoint and determines the regulating speed. The readjust time amounts
to three times the delay time. The delay time is determined by the reversing tangent of the heating curve of the room. In
general, the more inactive the overall system, the larger the parameterization values should be.
Pos: 25.18 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
30 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 25.19 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Zweistufiges Heizen Kühlen @ 13\mod_1284717573439_15.docx @ 90086 @ 3 @ 1
10.2.6
Two-stage heating / cooling
In specific instances such as when using underfloor heating, it may be necessary to install a quick additional stage for the
heat control in order to warm up the room rapidly. When the room thermostat is preset to "Additional heating stage active", it
has a second heating system with switching control that regulates with the 1-byte values 0% and 100%.
The parameters "Distance of the additional stage" and "Hysteresis (one-sided)" enable you to specify when the additional
stage switches on and off. For instance, if the setpoint for the additional stage is 18 °C and the hysteresis is 0.5 K (onesided), the controller switches on at 18 °C and off again at 18.5 °C.
The settings for the additional heating stage apply equally to the additional cooling stage, the only difference being that in
the case of cooling, when a set temperature has been exceeded, an additional cooling stage is switched on to cool the room
faster.
Since several actuating drives close (opened de-energised) at a 1-bit value of "1" or a 1-byte value of "255" and open at "0",
the mode of the control value can be changed via "Invert control value".
Pos: 25.20 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Sollwerte @ 13\mod_1284722358805_15.docx @ 90094 @ 2 @ 1
10.3
Set values
The room thermostat can operate with dependent or individual set values. Both versions are explained in greater detail in the
following.
Pos: 25.21 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Abhängige Sollwerte @ 13\mod_1284722436946_15.docx @ 90102 @ 3 @ 1
10.3.1
Dependent setpoints
In case of dependent setpoints there are two basic setpoints, one for heating ("Heating setpoint comfort operation" and one
for cooling ("Cooling setpoint comfort operation").
The settings "...lowering standby/night mode" or "...raising standby/night mode". This means, for example, when 21 °C has
been set for "Heating setpoint comfort mode" and 2 K was specified for "Lower heating setpoint standby", the heating
setpoint in standby mode is lowered by 2 K to 19 °C. If 4 K has been specified for "Lower heating setpoint standby", the
setpoint for "Heating setpoint for night mode" is 17 °C.
The dependence of the setpoints are also maintained after a manual setpoint shift. For example, when the user has effected
a setpoint shift of 1 K upward to 22 °C for the parameterized temperature "Heating setpoint comfort mode", this value will be
lowered by 2 K to 20 °C when comfort mode is activated. When night mode is called up, the value will be lowered by 4 K,
resulting in a setpoint of 18 °C.
The user can manually change the parameterized setpoints via the two buttons "Raise temperature" or "Lower temperature".
The change between "Heating setpoint comfort mode" and Cooling setpoint comfort mode" is made via a long press (approx.
1 sec.) of button "Raise temperature" to heating setpoint and on button "Lower temperature" to cooling setpoint.
The two specified setpoints for heating and cooling can also be changed as often as desired via the bus without the ETS.
Here a 2-byte temperature value must be sent to the communication object "Base setpoint - control". Depending on whether
heating or cooling is currently active, the value is stored as "Heating setpoint comfort mode" or "Cooling setpoint comfort
mode". The values received are stored in the memory of the device and are retained in case of bus power failure and
subsequent return of bus voltage. This makes it possible to send new base setpoints to the device via a visualization when
the use of a room changes, for example.
New parameterization is not required. In case of a manual adjustment and dependent setpoints the reference base setpoint
is taken into consideration. This is used to specify whether the base setpoint refers to the comfort temperature for heating,
cooling or the mid-range temperature between heating and cooling.
"Setpoint heating" is the default setting. In regions where the cooling function is more important, it is recommended that you
change this parameter to "Setpoint cooling". This makes it easier to set the room thermostat and raise the cooling setpoint
(standby temperature cooling and night setback cooling).
Pos: 25.22 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 31
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 25.23 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Individuelle Sollwerte @ 13\mod_1284722653915_15.docx @ 90110 @ 3 @ 1
10.3.2
Individual setpoints
When individual setpoints are used, individual setpoints are defined for each operating mode ("Heating setpoint comfort
mode", Heating setpoint standby", "Heating setpoint night mode", "Cooling setpoint standby" and "Cooling setpoint night
mode".
Different to the dependent setpoints, the individual setpoints are also maintained after a manual setpoint shift. For example,
when the user has effected a setpoint shift of the parameterized temperature "Heating setpoint comfort mode" upward or
downward, the parameterized value "Heating setpoint standby" will always be called up when standby mode is activated.
This means that only the fixed setpoints that are stored will be called up for the individual operating modes.
The user can manually change the parameterized setpoints via the two buttons "Raise temperature" or "Lower temperature".
The change between "Heating setpoint comfort mode" and "Cooling setpoint comfort mode" is made via a long press
(approx. 1 sec.) of button "Raise temperature" to heating setpoint and on button "Lower temperature" to cooling setpoint.
The specified setpoints can be changed as often as desired via the bus also without the ETS. For this, a 2-byte temperature
value must be sent to the corresponding communication object "Setpoint heating comfort", "Setpoint heating standby",
Setpoint heating night mode", "Setpoint frost protection", "Setpoint cooling comfort", "Setpoint cooling standby", "Setpoint
cooling night mode" or "Setpoint heat protection". The values received are stored in the memory of the device and are
retained in case of bus power failure and subsequent return of bus voltage. This makes it possible to send new setpoints to
the device via a visualization when the use of a room changes, for example. New parameterization is not required.
Pos: 25.24 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Mindestabstand @ 13\mod_1284722752633_15.docx @ 90118 @ 3 @ 1
10.3.3
Minimum distance
The adjustable parameter "Minimum distance between heating and cooling" is active both for the dependent and the
individual setpoints.
The minimum distance is always between "Heating setpoint comfort mode" and "Cooling setpoint comfort mode". It serves as
a buffer zone to prevent the the two setpoints from interfering with each other.
Example:
Individual setpoints has been selected. The "Heating setpoint comfort mode" is 21 °C and the "Cooling setpoint comfort
mode" is set on 26 °C. The dead zone between heating and cooling is 3 K. If a heating setpoint is now shifted upwards, the
dead zone also shifts upwards. If the shift exceeds a temperature of 23 °C, the "Cooling setpoint comfort mode" will also
shift upwards so that a minimum distance of 3 K is always guaranteed between heating and cooling.
If a cooling setpoint is shifted downwards, the dead zone also shifts downwards. If the shift exceeds a temperature of 24 °C,
the "Heating setpoint comfort mode" will also shift downwards so that a minimum distance is also guaranteed in this case.
Pos: 25.25 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
32 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 25.26 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Fan Coil Allgemein @ 13\mod_1284722830008_15.docx @ 90126 @ 2 @ 1
10.4
Fan coil, general
The ventilation convectors, also called fan convectors or fan coil units, are used for decentralized heating and cooling. They
are installed in the room and supplied via a central heating and cooling system. There are two-pipe and four-pipe systems.
There are multi-stage ventilators within a fan coil unit that enable fast adjustment to the room temperature to be made
according to individual requirements. The fan coil room thermostat with display can activate up to three fan stages either
manually or automatically.
The fan stages can be activated in three ways:
•
via 1-bit values,
i.e., a 1-bit communication object "Fan coil stage ... switching" is made available for each fan stage. This required for
"normal switch actuators. ((When using KNX switch actuators and fan coil units, the connecting instructions for the fan
coil unit are to be observed).
•
via 1-byte object as numerical value 0-3,
i.e. there is a 1-byte communication object "Fan stage manual 1 byte" which is connected with a corresponding
communication object of a fan coil actuator. Here the value 0 = OFF 1 = stage 1 2 = stage 2 3 = stage 3
•
via 1-byte object as constant value 0-100%,
i.e. there is a 1-byte communication object "Fan stage manual 1 byte" which is connected with a corresponding
communication object of a fan coil actuator. During manual stage switchover the stage threshold values that are set on
tab heating or cooling are sent out. In heating mode the threshold values for heating, in cooling mode the threshold
values for cooling. To ensure that the fan coil unit switches the fan stages, the parameters of the associated fan coil
actuator must be set accordingly.
Via parameter "Evaluate fan stage status byte" a 1-byte communication object "Fan coil operating state", which is connected
with a corresponding object of a fan coil actuator, can be enabled. This allows the fan coil room thermostat evaluate which
fan stage is actually active on the fan coil actuator. The display corresponds to the value of the communication object (0 =
OFF, 1 = stage 1, 2 = stage 2, 3 = stage 3).
The parameter "Evaluate operation status byte" activates a 1-bit communication object "Receive during operation - actuator
monitoring". Cyclical telegrams from the fan coil actuator can be received and evaluated on this object. This allows the room
thermostat to check whether the fan coil actuator is still operating and can be activated. If the fan coil actuator has a problem
and can no longer send cyclical telegrams, the room thermostat will indicate this on the display with the "Error" symbol. If the
error on the fan coil actuator has been rectified and cyclical telegrams can be received, the "Error" on the display is removed
and the room thermostat will again function as "Normal".
The cycle time setting "In operation" in the fan coil actuator should be selected at least twice as large as the monitoring time
in the room thermostat ("Sending cycle time of actuator in sec."). A practical cycle time for the actuator is approximately 60
seconds with a monitoring time of 120 seconds for the room thermostat.
To prevent an excessive noise level in hotel rooms during the silent period in the night, a "Stage limitation for night mode"
can be set. This means that during night mode only the fan stage that has been set is automatically switched to. All fan
stages can be activated again when changing to a different operating mode.
Parameter "Stage limitation for night mode" can be used to set a limit to "Stage 2" or "Stage 1" or the ventilation can be
completely deactivated.
Pos: 25.27 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 33
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 25.28 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Kompensation @ 13\mod_1284723063462_15.docx @ 90134 @ 2 @ 1
10.5
Compensation
The fan coil room thermostat with display has the two compensation types, summer and winter compensation. Each is
explained in greater detail in the following.
Pos: 25.29 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Sommerkompensation @ 13\mod_1284723143680_15.docx @ 90142 @ 3 @ 1
10.5.1
Summer compensation
To save energy and to maintain a reasonable temperature difference when entering an air-conditioned building, the room
temperature should be adjusted in relation to the external temperature (summer compensation according to DIN 1946). The
room temperature is raised by adjusting the "Cooling setpoint comfort mode".
Raising the room temperature does not, however, mean that you heat up the room. Rather the adjustment is intended to
allow the room temperature without cooling to increase to a specified value. This prevents the cooling system from further
reducing the room temperature to 24 °C with an external temperature of 35 °C.
However, the activation of summer compensation makes an external temperature sensor necessary that sends its measured
value to the KNX for evaluation by the room thermostat with display.
The following parameters are available for summer compensation:
•
"Summer compensation lower outside temperature value"
•
"Summer compensation upper outside temperature value"
•
“Summer compensation lower setpoint offset"
•
“Summer compensation upper setpoint offset"
The value of the lower and upper temperature is used to specify from and to which temperature value a setpoint correction is
to be made.
The lower and upper setpoint offset is used to specify by how many Kelvin the setpoint specified in the parameters or by the
user via a manual shift is to be adjusted during summer compensation.
Typical values for the summer compensation are:
•
20 °C: lower outside temperature value
•
32 °C: upper outside temperature value
•
0 K: lower setpoint offset
•
4 K: upper setpoint offset
That means that a flowing setpoint increase of 0 to 4 K occurs if the outside temperature increases from 20°C to 32°C.
Example:
In the lower diagram 25 °C has been parameterized for "Cooling setpoint comfort". When the outside temperature rises, the
parameterized setpoint is raised starting from an outside temperature of 20 °C flowing from 25 °C to 29 °C. The 29 °C are
reached at an outside temperature of 32 °C. After this the setpoint is no longer raised even though the outside temperature
rises.
Note:
When compensation is active, CO is shown on the display of the room thermostat.
Pos: 25.30 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
34 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 25.31 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-triton/Planerunterstützung RTR/Winterkompensation -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422553153360_15.docx @ 331910 @ 3 @ 1
10.5.2
Winter compensation
To improve comfort and to keep the temperature difference when entering a room with large window areas within
comfortable limits, an increase of the room temperature in dependence of the outside temperature should be performed
during the winter (winter compensation). The room temperature is raised by adjusting the "Heating setpoint comfort mode".
However, similar to summer compensation, winter compensation makes an external temperature sensor necessary that
sends its measured value to the KNX for evaluation by the room temperature controller with display.
The following parameters are available for winter compensation:
•
"Winter compensation lower outside temperature value"
•
"Winter compensation upper outside temperature value",
•
"Winter compensation lower setpoint offset",
•
"Winter compensation upper setpoint offset".
The value of the lower and upper temperature is used to specify from and up to which temperature value a setpoint
correction is to be made.
The lower and upper setpoint offset is used to specify by how many Kelvin the setpoint specified in the parameters or by the
user via a manual shift is to be adjusted during winter compensation.
Typical values for the winter compensation are:
•
0°C: lower outside temperature value
•
10°C: upper outside temperature value
•
4 K: lower setpoint offset
•
0 K: upper setpoint offset
That means that a flowing setpoint increase from 0 to 4 K occurs if the outside temperature falls from 10°C to 0°C.
For example:
In the lower diagram 21°C has been parameterized for "Heating setpoint comfort". When the outside temperature falls, the
parameterized setpoint is raised starting from an outside temperature of 10°C flowing from 21°C to 25°C. The 25°C are
reached at an outside temperature of 0°C. After this the setpoint is no longer raised even though the outside temperature
continuous to fall.
Note...
When compensation is active, "CO" is shown on the display.
6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]:
Winter compensation is not available for this!
Pos: 26 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 35
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.1 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/1. Ebene/A - FApplikationsbeschreibungen @ 9\mod_1269243903093_15.docx @ 52343 @ 1 @ 1
11
Description of application
Pos: 27.2 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/Applikationsbeschreibungen/App. - ohne Raumtemperaturregelung 6351/08-825 + 6344-101 - DIN-A4 -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422555321663_15.docx @ 332003 @ @ 1
(without room temperature control 6351/08-825 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0] -> see separate chapter)
6351/08-825-500 + 6344-101-500 [from update version 0.1.6.0]:
When using a native ETS application the user does not have all "General functions" (logics)
available. This is only the case under PowerTool.
Pos: 27.3 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Schalten, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269245200625_15.docx @ 52356 @ 2 @ 1
11.1
Switching, rocker total
Pos: 27.4 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Schalten_Wippe_gesamt/App. - Schalten, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269244387750_15.docx @ 52348 @ @ 1
With the "Switch, rocker total" application, an operation of the right or left side of the rocker sends out a switch telegram.
The "Switch, rocker total" application differentiates here between whether the rocker is operated on the left or right side.
Switching objects, rocker total
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switching
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
Pos: 27.5 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Schalten, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269245253031_15.docx @ 52360 @ 2 @ 1
11.2
Switching, rocker left/right
Pos: 27.6 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Schalten_Taste/App. - Schalten, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269420582437_15.docx @ 52553 @ @ 1
With the application "Switching, rocker left/right" a switch telegram is sent when the rocker is actuated and/or released.
"Rocker left/right" does not differentiate whether the rocker is actuated on the right or the left side. In each case, the
application makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available for the right and left side of the rocker.
The application enables a switching function to be implemented with one side of the rocker and to assign an additional
"button-oriented" function to the other side of the rocker.
Switching objects, rocker left/right
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switching
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
Pos: 27.7 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Dimmen, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269422737250_15.docx @ 52683 @ 2 @ 1
11.3
Dimming, rocker total
Pos: 27.8 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Dimmen_Wippe_gesamt/App. - Dimmen, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269422368187_15.docx @ 52558 @ @ 1
With the "Dimming, rocker total" application, a rocker has communication objects for switching and for dimming. A distinction
is made between short and long button contact.
The "Dimming, rocker total" application differentiates between whether the rocker is operated on the left or right side. The
"Principle of operation of the rocker for …" parameter allows adjustment of whether the left or right side switches on or off or
whether it is dimmed brighter or darker.
Dimming objects, rocker total
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switching
1 Bit EIS2 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
1
Relative dimming
4 Bit EIS2 / DPT 3.007
C, T
Pos: 27.9 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
36 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.10 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Dimmen, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269423462609_15.docx @ 52694 @ 2 @ 1
11.4
Dimming, rocker left/right
Pos: 27.11 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/DimmenTaste (Wippe Links Rechts)App. - Dimmen, Wippe links / rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269423217171_15.docx @ 52689 @ @ 1
With the "Dimming, rocker left/right" application, a rocker switch has communication objects for switching and for dimming. A
distinction is made between short (switching) and long (dimming) button contact.
The "Dimming, rocker left/right" application does not differentiate between whether the rocker is operated on the left or right
side. In each case, the application makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available for the right
and left side of the rocker.
The application makes it possible to dim a light via one side of the rocker and to assign an additional "button-orientated"
function to the other side.
Dimming objects, rocker left/right
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switching
1 Bit EIS2 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
1
Relative dimming
4 Bit EIS2 / DPT 3.007
C, T
Pos: 27.12 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Jalousie, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269423899109_15.docx @ 52704 @ 2 @ 1
11.5
Blind, rocker total
Pos: 27.13 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Jal_Wippe_gesamt/App. - Jalousie, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269423548328_15.docx @ 52699 @ @ 1
Via the application "Blind, rocker total", blind movement and/or slat adjustment commands can be sent to connected shutting
actuators with a short or long contact of the rocker. A short button contact always triggers a slat adjustment or stop
command and a long button contact always triggers a move command.
The control always remembers the last action performed on the side of the rocker switch that is assigned with the "Blind,
rocker total" application. If a blind was lowered and halted at half height via a short button contact, then a renewed long
button contact will raise the blind.
Blind objects, rocker total
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
0
Adjusting(1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, T
Adjusting (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
1
Move (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007
C, T
1
Move(1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
Pos: 27.14 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Jalousie, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269424455828_15.docx @ 52715 @ 2 @ 1
11.6
Blind, rocker left/right
Pos: 27.15 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/JalousieTasteApp. - Jalousie, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269424218921_15.docx @ 52710 @ @ 1
Via the application "Blind, rocker left/right", blind movement and/or slat adjustment commands can be sent to connected
shutting actuators with short or long actuation of the rocker. A short button contact always triggers a move command and a
long button contact always triggers a slat adjustment or stop command.
The application "Blind, rocker left/right" makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available in each
case for the right or left side of the rocker. This facilitates control of a Venetian blind with one side of the rocker and
assigning an additional "Rocker, left/right" function to the other side of the rocker.
The control always remembers the last action performed on the side of the rocker that is assigned with the "Blind, rocker
left/right" application. If a blind was lowered and halted at half height via a long button contact, then a renewed short button
contact will raise the blind.
Blind objects, rocker left/right
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Adjusting (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007
C, W, T, U
0
Adjusting(1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
1
Moving(1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, W, T, U
1
Moving(1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
Pos: 27.16 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 37
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.17 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wertsender, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269425035171_15.docx @ 52725 @ 2 @ 1
11.7
Value sender, rocker total
Pos: 27.18 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Wert Wippe/App. - Wertsender, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269424602000_15.docx @ 52720 @ @ 1
With the "Value sender, rocker total" application, a telegram with the predefined value is sent out at an actuation of the right
or left side of the rocker.
The "Value sender, rocker total" application differentiates here between whether the rocker is actuated on the left or right
side.
Value sender objects, rocker total
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switching value(1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching value(1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching value(1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T, U
0
Switching value(2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, T, U
0
Switching value(2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching value (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching value (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, T, U
0
Switching value (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching value (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W, T, U
Pos: 27.19 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wertsender, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269425766812_15.docx @ 52735 @ 2 @ 1
11.8
Value sender, rocker left/right
Pos: 27.20 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Wert Taste/App. - Wertsender, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269425575718_15.docx @ 52730 @ @ 1
With the "Value sender, rocker left/right" application, a telegram with a predefined value is sent out at an actuation or release
of the rocker.
The "Value sender, rocker left/right" application does not differentiate between whether the rocker is actuated on the left or
right side. In each case, the application makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available for the
right and left side of the rocker.
The application enables realising a switching function via one rocker side, while the other rocker side can be assigned with
an additional "button-orientated" function.
Value sender objects, rocker left/right
No.
Object name
Data type
0
Switching (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W, T, U
Pos: 27.21 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
38 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Flags
Pos: 27.22 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wertsender, 2 Objekte, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269431015140_15.docx @ 52763 @ 2 @ 1
11.9
Value sender, 2 objects, rocker left/right
Pos: 27.23 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Wertsender_2_Objekte_Wippe_links_rechts/App. - Wertsender, 2 Objekte, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269428977390_15.docx @ 52758 @ @ 1
With the "Value sender, 2 objects, rocker left/right" application, two telegrams with predefined values from two different
communication objects can be sent out by actuation and/or upon release of the rocker.
The application "Value sender, 2 objects, rocker left/right" makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects
available in each case for the right or left side of the rocker.
For example, the application facilitates the sending out of a switching function and a floating point value with the actuation of
one rocker side and assigning an additional "button orientated" function to the other side of the rocker.
Value sender objects, 2 objects, rocker left/right
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switching (rising flank) (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (rising flank) (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (rising flank) (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (rising flank) (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 1.xxx
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (rising flank) (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (rising flank) (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (rising flank) (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (rising flank) (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W, T, U
0
Switching (rising flank) (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W, T, U
1
Switching (falling flank) (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
1
Switching (falling flank) (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
1
Switching (falling flank) (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T, U
1
Switching (falling flank) (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, T, U
1
Switching (falling flank) (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, T, U
1
Switching (falling flank) (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W, T, U
1
Switching (falling flank) (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, T, U
1
Switching (falling flank) (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W, T, U
1
Switching (falling flank) (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W, T, U
Pos: 27.24 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wertdimmsensor, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269431267671_15.docx @ 52773 @ 2 @ 1
11.10
Value dimming sensor, rocker total
Pos: 27.25 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Wertdimmsensor_Wippe_gesamt/App. - Wertdimmsensor, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269431145656_15.docx @ 52768 @ @ 1
With the application "Value dimming sensor, rocker total", it is possible to send 1-byte telegrams by actuating the rocker.
Each actuation of the left or right side of the rocker will increase or reduce a 1-byte value (percent or values from 0 to 255).
The 1-byte value can be connected with 1-byte brightness value objects of dimming actuators. This allows a dimming
actuator to be dimmed brighter or darker with the rocker via value telegrams.
Value dimming sensor objects, rocker total
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Value
1 Byte / EIS6/14 / DPT 5.001 /
C, W, T, U
DPT 5.010
Pos: 27.26 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 39
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.27 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Lichtszenennebenstelle mit Speicherfunktion @ 9\mod_1269436310937_15.docx @ 52783 @ 2 @ 1
11.11
Light scene extension unit with memory function
Pos: 27.28 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Lichtszenennebenstelle_mit_Speicherfunktion/App. - Lichtszenennebenstelle mit Speicherfunktion - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269435757171_15.docx @ 52778 @ @ 1
Via the application "Light scene extension unit with memory function", a predefined light scene number is called up when the
rocker is actuated.
The application "Light scene extension unit with memory function" makes a separate set of parameters and communication
objects available in each case for the right or left side of the rocker.
The application facilitates calling up a light scene via a rocker side while the other rocker side can be assigned an additional
"button orientated" function.
The user has the option to trigger a light scene memory command with a long button contact.
Light scene extension unit objects with memory function
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switching
1 Byte EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
Pos: 27.29 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Stufenschalter, Wippe Gesamt @ 9\mod_1269437200187_15.docx @ 52793 @ 2 @ 1
11.12
Step switch, rocker total
Pos: 27.30 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/StufenschalterWippeApp. - Stufenschalter, Wippe Gesamt - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269436921171_15.docx @ 52788 @ @ 1
The application "Step switch, rocker total" facilitates step-type switching. This means that the user can trigger different
switching processes with each new operation of the left or right side of the rocker.
Example:
First operation (right rocker side) switches lamp 1 on.
Second operation (right rocker side) switches lamp 1 off and lamp 2 on.
Third operation (right rocker side) switches lamp 2 off and lamp 3 on.
Fourth operation (left rocker side) switches lamp 3 off and lamp 2 on.
Fifth operation (left rocker side) switches lamp 2 off and lamp 1 on.
etc.
The application differentiates between whether the left or right side of the rocker was operated. Depending on the setting,
one lower or one higher step can be switched to.
Up to five switching steps can be activated.
Step switch objects, rocker total
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switching step 1
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
1
Switching step 2
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
2
Switching step 3
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
3
Switching step 4
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
4
Switching step 5
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
Pos: 27.31 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
40 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.32 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Stufenschalter, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269437464625_15.docx @ 52803 @ 2 @ 1
11.13
Step switch, rocker left/right
Pos: 27.33 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/StufenschalterTasteApp. - Stufenschalter, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269437349390_15.docx @ 52798 @ @ 1
The application "Step switch, rocker left/right" facilitates step-type switching. This means that the user can trigger different
switching processes with each new operation of the rocker switch.
Example:
First operation switches lamp 1 on.
Second operation switches lamp 1 off and lamp 2 on.
Third operation switches lamp 2 off and lamp 3 on.
Fourth operation switches lamp 3 off and lamp 1 on.
etc.
Up to five switching steps can be activated.
In each case, the application "Step switch, button oriented" makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects
available for the right or left side of the rocker.
The application enables realising switching functions via one rocker side while the other rocker side can be assigned with an
additional "button orientated" function.
Step switch objects, rocker left/right
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switching step 1
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
1
Switching step 2
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
2
Switching step 3
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
3
Switching step 4
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
4
Switching step 5
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
Pos: 27.34 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Mehrfachbetätigung, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269438670421_15.docx @ 52813 @ 2 @ 1
11.14
Multiple operation, rocker left/right
Pos: 27.35 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Mehrfachbetätigung_Wippe_links_rechts/App. - Mehrfachbetätigung, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269437591625_15.docx @ 52808 @ @ 1
With the "Multiple operation, rocker left/right" application, a differentiation can be made between a single, double, triple,
quadruple or quintuple operation of the rocker. Different values can be sent out for every operation: single, double, triple,
quadruple, or quintuple.
The application "Multiple operation, rocker left/right" makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects
available in each case for the right or left side of the rocker. It is therefore possible to realise a multiple operation via one
side of the rocker and assigning a "button-orientated" function to the other side of the rocker.
Multiple operation objects, rocker left/right
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switching 1, multiple operation (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
0
Switching 1, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T
0
Switching 1, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T
0
Switching 1, multiple operation (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, T
0
Switching 1, multiple operation (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W, T
0
Switching 1, multiple operation (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, T
0
Switching 1, multiple operation (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, T
0
Switching 1, multiple operation (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W, T
0
Switching 1, multiple operation (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W, T
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 41
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Multiple operation objects, rocker left/right, continued
No.
Object name
Data type
1
Switching 2, multiple operation (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
1
Switching 2, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T
1
Switching 2, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T
1
Switching 2, multiple operation (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, T
1
Switching 2, multiple operation (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W, T
1
Switching 2, multiple operation (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, T
1
Switching 2, multiple operation (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, T
1
Switching 2, multiple operation (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W, T
1
Switching 2, multiple operation (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W, T
2
Switching 3, multiple operation (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
2
Switching 3, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T
2
Switching 3, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T
2
Switching 3, multiple operation (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, T
2
Switching 3, multiple operation (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W, T
2
Switching 3, multiple operation (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, T
2
Switching 3, multiple operation (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, T
2
Switching 3, multiple operation (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W, T
2
Switching 3, multiple operation (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W, T
3
Switching 4, multiple operation (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
3
Switching 4, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T
3
Switching 4, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T
3
Switching 4, multiple operation (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, T
3
Switching 4, multiple operation (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W, T
3
Switching 4, multiple operation (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, T
3
Switching 4, multiple operation (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, T
3
Switching 4, multiple operation (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W, T
3
Switching 4, multiple operation (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W, T
4
Switching 5, multiple operation (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
4
Switching 5, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T
4
Switching 5, multiple operation (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T
4
Switching 5, multiple operation (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, T
4
Switching 5, multiple operation (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W, T
4
Switching 5, multiple operation (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, T
4
Switching 5, multiple operation (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, T
4
Switching 5, multiple operation (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W, T
4
Switching 5, multiple operation (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W, T
Pos: 27.36 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
42 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Flags
Pos: 27.37 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Kurz-Lang-Bedienung, Wippe Links / Rechts @ 9\mod_1269440952703_15.docx @ 52823 @ 2 @ 1
11.15
Short/long operation, rocker left/right
Pos: 27.38 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Kurz_lang_Bedienung_Wippe_links_rechts/App. - Kurz-Lang-Bedienung, Wippe Links / Rechts - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269440785765_15.docx @ 52818 @ @ 1
Via the application "Short/long operation, rocker left/right", different values can be sent out with a short and/or long actuation
of the rocker switch.
The "Short/long operation, rocker left/right" application does not differentiate between whether the rocker is actuated on the
left or right side. In each case, the application makes a separate set of parameters and communication objects available for
the right and left side of the rocker.
The application facilitates making two separate functions available on one side of the rocker that can be called up via a short
or long button contact and assigning the other side of the rocker switch with an additional "button-orientated" function.
Short/long operation objects, rocker left/right
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
C, W, T, U
0
Adjusting(1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007
0
Adjusting(1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
1
Moving (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, W, T, U
1
Moving (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
Pos: 27.39 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/RTR-Betriebsart einstellen @ 9\mod_1269441295921_15.docx @ 52833 @ 2 @ 1
11.16
Setting RTC operation mode
Pos: 27.40 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/RTR-Betriebsart/App. - RTR-Betriebsart einstellen - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269441072468_15.docx @ 52828 @ @ 1
With the "Setting the RTC operation mode" application, an operation mode switchover for connected room temperature
controllers can be carried out via an actuation of a rocker side.
Depending on the setting of the "Object type for output" parameter, the application offers either three 1-bit communication
objects "Operation mode comfort", "Operation mode night", and "Operation mode frost" or a 1-byte communication object
"Operation mode".
The selection "1-bit" is used for the control of room temperature controllers that have 1-bit communication objects for
operation mode switchover. The "1-byte" selection is used for the control of room temperature controllers that have a 1-byte
communication object for operation mode switchover to KNX. In this case, the values mean
0 = Auto
1 = Comfort
2 = Standby
3 = Night
4 = Frost / Heat protection
The function can be temporarily blocked via a 1-bit "Enable" communication object.
Setting RTC operation mode objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Enable
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
1
Operation mode Comfort(1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
2
Operation mode Night(1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
3
Operation mode Frost(1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
4
Operation mode (1 Byte)
1 Byte / DPT 20.102
C, T
Pos: 27.41 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 43
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.42 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Mediensteuerung CD-Player @ 9\mod_1269500376630_15.docx @ 52849 @ 2 @ 1
11.17
Media control, CD player
A CD player can be remotely controlled via the bus using the "Media control, CD player" application.
The symbols for "On/Off", "CD selection", "Player control" and "Volume" are shown first on the display. Via the pushbutton/rotary control element, the user can access a submenu ("CD selection", "Player control" and "Volume") or can switch
directly on or off via a push-button operation.
In the submenu "Player control" the symbols for Start, Stop, Forward etc. are shown on the display. By turning the pushbutton/rotary control element, the user can select the desired function (focus) and trigger it with a push-button operation. The
"CD selection" submenu functions in a similar way.
If the volume is to be regulated, a special volume symbol is shown on the display which signals the user that: a turn to the
right increases the volume and a turn to the left reduces the volume. A feedback signal from the connected actuator can not
be shown here.
Depending on the function, telegrams to the CD player control are sent out on the communication objects for "CD on/off",
"CD selection", "CD play", "CD stop", "CD pause", "CD previous track", "CD next track", "CD volume".
In addition, the function can be temporarily blocked via an additional 1-bit "Enable" communication object.
Hint:
The function is practical only if a corresponding additional unit, such as the media box made by Coldwey, for CD player
activation is used as receiver of the sent out telegrams.
Pos: 27.43 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Mediensteuerung CD-Player/App. - Mediensteuerung CD-Player - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269499470874_15.docx @ 52844 @ @ 1
Media control objects, CD player
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Enable
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
1
CD On, Off
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
2
CD Selection
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
3
CD Play
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
4
CD Stop
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
5
CD Pause
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
6
CD Previous track
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
7
CD Next track
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
8
CD Volume
4 Bit EIS2 / DPT 3.007
C, T
Pos: 27.44 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
44 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.45 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Mediensteuerung Radio @ 9\mod_1269500818782_15.docx @ 52860 @ 2 @ 1
11.18
Media control, radio
A radio can be remotely controlled via the bus using the "Media control, radio" application.
The symbols for "On/Off", "Radio station selection" and "Volume" are shown first on the display. Via the push-button/rotary
control element, the user can access a submenu ("Radio station selection" and "Volume") or can switch directly on or off via
a push-button operation.
The stations that can be selected are listed in the "Radio station selection" submenu. By turning the
push-button/rotary control element, the user can select the desired station (focus) and call it up via a push-button operation.
If the volume is to be regulated, a special volume symbol is shown on the display which signals the user that: a turn to the
right increases the volume and a turn to the left reduces the volume. A feedback signal from the connected actuator can not
be shown here.
Depending on the function, telegrams for radio control are sent out on the communication objects for "Radio On/Off",
"Station selection" and "Radio volume".
In addition, the function can be temporarily blocked via an additional 1-bit "Enable" communication object.
Hint:
The function is practical only if a corresponding actuator (audio actuator) for radio activation is used as receiver for the sent
out telegrams.
Pos: 27.46 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/MediensteuerungRadio/App. - Mediensteuerung Radio - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269500514614_15.docx @ 52855 @ @ 1
Media control objects, radio
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Enable
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
0
Radio On, Off
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
0
Station selection
1 Bit EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, T
0
Radio volume
4 Bit EIS2 / DPT 3.007
C, T
Pos: 27.47 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 45
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.48 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Mediensteuerung Video-Player @ 9\mod_1269501501586_15.docx @ 52871 @ 2 @ 1
11.19
Media control, video player
A CD player can be remotely controlled via the bus using the "Media control CD player" application.
The symbols for "On/Off", "Player control" and "Volume" are shown first on the display. Via the push-button/rotary control
element, the user can access a submenu ("Player control" and "Volume") or can switch directly on or off via a push-button
operation.
In the submenu "Player control" the symbols for Start, Stop, Forward etc. are shown on the display. By turning the pushbutton/rotary control element, the user can select the desired function (focus) and trigger it with a push-button operation.
If the volume is to be regulated, a special volume symbol is shown on the display which signals the user that: a turn to the
right increases the volume and a turn to the left reduces the volume.
A feedback signal from the connected actuator can not be shown here.
Depending on the function, telegrams to the video player control are sent out for "Video on/off", "Video selection", "Video
play", "Video stop", "Video pause", "Video rewind", "Video fast-forward", "Video volume". In addition, the function can be
temporarily blocked via an additional 1-bit "Enable" communication object.
Hint:
The function is practical only when a corresponding actuator (video actuator) for video player activation is used as
receiver for the sent out telegrams.
Pos: 27.49 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/MediensteuerungVideo/App. - Mediensteuerung Video-Player - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269500928769_15.docx @ 52866 @ @ 1
Media control objects, video player
No.
Object name
Data type
0
Enable
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
Flags
C, T, U
1
Video On, Off
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
2
Video Play
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
3
Video Stop
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
4
Video Pause
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
5
Video Forward (Video Rewind)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
6
Video Rewind (Video Forward)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
7
Video Volume
4 Bit EIS2 / DPT 3.007
C, T
Pos: 27.50 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Kurzzeittimer @ 9\mod_1269501915203_15.docx @ 52882 @ 2 @ 1
11.20
Short-time timer
Via the alarm or timer function there is the option of triggering an acoustic signal at a specific time or after expiration of an
entered time.
The "short-time timer" application displays a timer function. There is the option here of triggering an acoustic signal via the
internal speaker after expiration of an entered time. The time (up to 12 h 59 min) is set by the user via the push-button/rotary
control element. After expiration of the set time, a signal tone is triggered on the unit which can be confirmed via the pushbutton/rotary control element.
The set "Value for timer start" (ON or OFF) is sent out via a 1-bit "Timer status" communication object at timer start. The set
"Value for timer expiration" (ON or OFF) is sent out at timer expiration.
Pos: 27.51 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Kurzzeittimer/App. - Kurzzeittimer - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269501730439_15.docx @ 52877 @ @ 1
Short-time timer objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Adjusting (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007
C, W, T, U
0
Adjusting (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
1
Moving (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, W, T, U
1
Moving (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
Pos: 27.52 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
46 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.53 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wochenschaltuhr @ 9\mod_1269504586283_15.docx @ 52893 @ 2 @ 1
11.21
Weekly timer
With the "week timer" it is possible to call up defined switching times that are stored in the unit. Up to four different programs
can be called up and edited by the user on the display via the push-button / rotary control element.
For the activation of different actuators, the size of the "Value" communication objects can be separately set for every
individual program under the "Object type" parameter.
Up to four time blocks can be specified for each program. This means that four switching times (control times) to those
predefined values are sent out on the associated communication object "Value".
For specifying the individual switching times the application uses the system time of the device. The current time can be
synchronized in the device settings via the 3-byte "Time" communication object (see unit settings).
Pos: 27.54 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Wochenschaltuhr/App. - Wochenschaltuhr - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269502016677_15.docx @ 52888 @ @ 1
Weekly timer objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Absence
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
1…4
Value 1 [2…4] (1 bit switching)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
1…4
Value 1 [2…4] (1 bit moving)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, T
1…4
Value 1 [2…4] (1 byte light scene number)
1 Byte / DPT 18.001
C, T
1…4
Value 1 [2…4] (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
1…4
Value 1 [2…4] (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, T
1…4
Value 1 [2…4] (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, T
1…4
Value 1 [2…4] (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, T
Pos: 27.55 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 47
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.56 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Wecker @ 9\mod_1269505094679_15.docx @ 52904 @ 2 @ 1
11.22
Alarm clock
Alarm times (alarm clock times) can be defined with the "Alarm-clock" application. The times are set by the user with the
push-button/rotary control element. When the set time is reached, a signal tone is triggered on the device which can be
confirmed via the push-button/rotary control element.
When the alarm time has been reached, additional functions can be integrated into the alarm call function via a
communication object. In addition, there is the option of sending out an advanced telegram, i.e. a telegram which is triggered
before reaching the alarm time. For the activation of different actuators, the size of the "Switching" and "Advanced switching"
communication objects is adjustable under the "Object type" parameter.
Pos: 27.57 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Wecker/App. - Wecker - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269504649733_15.docx @ 52899 @ @ 1
Alarm clock objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Acknowledgement
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
1
Snooze
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
2
Switching (1-bit switching)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
2
Switching (1-bit moving)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, T
2
Switching(1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
2
Switching (scene call-up)
1 Byte / DPT 18.001
C, T
2
Switching(1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 1.010
C, T
2
Switching(2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, T
2
Switching (relative temperature)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001
C, T
2
Switching (absolute temperature)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001
C, T
3
Switching, advanced (1-bit switching)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
3
Switching, advanced (1-bit moving)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, T
3
Switching, advanced(1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
3
Switching, advanced (scene call-up)
1 Byte / DPT 18.001
C, T
3
Switching, advanced(1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, T
3
Switching, advanced(2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, T
3
Switching, advanced (relative temperature)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001
C, T
3
Switching, advanced (absolute temperature)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001
C, T
Pos: 27.58 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
48 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.59 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Meldungen @ 9\mod_1269505427898_15.docx @ 52915 @ 2 @ 1
11.23
Messages
Messages can be shown on the display and acoustically signaled over the internal loudspeaker. These can be predefined
system messages such as "Storage medium was removed" or freely definable messages. A maximum of ten messages
(message texts) can be created. The displayed message text is restricted to 48 characters.
Every message is assigned a priority (warning level) which determines the display of the message window. Information and
alarm messages are indicated by a green bar. Warnings have a red bar and alarm messages appear completely red.
One or several active messages are shown in the display as soon as the user calls up the circuit menu. The circuit menu is
only shown after all pending messages have been confirmed with "OK". The order in which the messages are issued is
adjustable.
Should a message become active while a user is operating the device, this will be shown immediately. When the primary
function is active, pending messages in the status line are shown by a blinking symbol. Depending on the message priority,
a different symbol is used here. If several messages are active, the message symbol with the highest priority is always
shown.
Pos: 27.60 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Meldungen/App. - Meldungen - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269505283373_15.docx @ 52910 @ @ 1
Message objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Message
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
1
Acknowledgement
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
Pos: 27.61 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Text für Titel @ 9\mod_1269507114151_15.docx @ 52976 @ 2 @ 1
11.24
Title text
The text/value display should be provided with a descriptive text that makes sense so that the user can recognise which text
is displayed. For example, "Outside temperature", "Wind speed", "Bedroom window open", etc.
The descriptive text is shown in the display during scrolling and appears in the top left if the function is selected (focused).
Pos: 27.62 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/ApplikationsbeschreibungenApp. - Text für Titel - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269506694622_15.docx @ 52971 @ @ 1
Title text objects
No.
Function
0
0
Object name
Data type
Flags
Text / Value
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
Text / Value
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 6.010
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.018
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
1 Bit EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
1 Bit EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 6.010
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.018
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, U
0
Text / Value
1 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W, U
Pos: 27.63 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 49
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.64 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Gerätesperre @ 9\mod_1269507282299_15.docx @ 52987 @ 2 @ 1
11.25
Unit blockage
The operation of the display from the circuit menu, or the call-up of individual functions, can be protected against
unauthorised access by means of a PIN. Entering the correct pin allows the device to be operated.
If a function is protected by a PIN, a lock symbol is shown on the display in front of the function description.
Hint:
Only one PIN can be assigned to each unit. If a wrong PIN is entered, there is no limit to the number of times the entry can
be repeated.
Pos: 27.65 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/Geraetesperre/App. - Gerätesperre - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269507196912_15.docx @ 52982 @ @ 1
Pos: 27.66 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/RTR-Einstellungen @ 9\mod_1269507439823_15.docx @ 53008 @ 2 @ 1
11.26
RTC settings
Default settings for the internal room temperature controller can be set with the "RTC settings" application. The room
temperature controller can be used for "Heating", "Cooling" as well as for "Heating and Cooling". There is also the option of
controlling fan coil actuators.
Pos: 27.67 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Display - GUI/RTR-Einstellungen/App. - RTR-Einstellungen - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269507357936_15.docx @ 53003 @ @ 1
Pos: 27.68 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Sequenzaktoreinstellungen @ 9\mod_1269508040953_15.docx @ 53019 @ 2 @ 1
11.27
Sequence actuator settings
With the "Sequence actuator settings" application and the press of the push-button/rotary control element it is possible to
consecutively send out multiple telegrams with different values in a predefined sequence via the same object.
The representation of a sequence on the display is based on the representation of a scene. In contrast to the "Scene", the
"Sequence actuator settings" application has only one communication object on which up to twelve individual values are
consecutively sent out in twelve firmly set times. The times can be freely set from 1 s to 12 h. The "Sequence actuator
settings" application lends itself to controlling showrooms for example.
If sequences are configured, they are listed together with scenes under menu item "Scenes" and can be started from there.
Values and delay times are edited under the "Scenes" menu item.
Via the "Quick run" function, the brightness values can be started up at an accelerated rate. The delay time then amounts to
a constant 3 s from value to value.
Pos: 27.69 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/ApplikationsbeschreibungenApp. - Sequenzaktoreinstellungen - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269507712999_15.docx @ 53014 @ @ 1
Sequence actuator settings objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
C, W, T
0
Enable
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
1
Sequence value (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
1
Sequence value (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
1
Sequence value (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, T
1
Sequence value (1-byte light scene number)
1 Byte / DPT 18.001
C, T
1
Sequence value (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, T
1
Sequence value (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, T
2
Sequence start-stop
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
3
Sequence status
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
Pos: 27.70 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
50 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.71 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Jalousieaktor @ 10\mod_1269514191049_15.docx @ 53234 @ 2 @ 1
11.28
Shutting actuator
Pos: 27.72 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Jalousieaktor/App. - Jalousieaktor - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269513864598_15.docx @ 53229 @ @ 1
With the "Shutting actuator" application the shutting actuator is activated (Flush-type switch actuator 2-gang).
It has two 1-bit communication objects "Move" and "Adjust". In addition, the Venetian blind can be moved to a defined
position via the 1-byte communication objects "Position" and "Slats position".
The behaviour can be adjusted so that no undefined state arises during a bus voltage recovery.
There is also the option of additionally activating a 1-bit communication object "Status response". The shutting actuator can
send out its current state over this.
Shutting actuator objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Move
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, W
1
Adjust
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007
C, W
1
Stop
1 Bit / DPT 1.017
C, W
2
Position
1 Byte EIS5 / DPT 5.001
C, W
3
Slats position
1 Byte EIS5 / DPT 5.001
C, W
4
Wind alarm
1 Bit / DPT 1.005
C, W
5
Rain alarm
1 Bit / DPT 1.005
C, W
6
Frost alarm
1 Bit / DPT 1.005
C, W
7
Move status
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, R, T
8
Position state
1 Byte EIS5 / DPT 5.001
C, R, T
9
Slats position status
1 Byte EIS5 / DPT 5.001
C, R, T
Pos: 27.73 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Schaltaktorapplikation @ 10\mod_1269514683702_15.docx @ 53245 @ 2 @ 1
11.29
Switch actuator application
The flush-type switch actuator is activated with the "Switch actuator application" application.
For this the application has a 1-bit communication object "Switch object". Depending on the setting of the "Relay
characteristics" parameter, the relay contact is opened or closed after receipt of an ON or OFF telegram.
The behaviour can be adjusted so that no undefined state arises after a bus voltage failure and subsequent return of
voltage.
There is also the option of activating an additional 1-bit communication object "Status response". The switching actuator can
send out its current state over this. Whether an ON or an OFF telegram is triggered during a closed or an opened relay
contact depends on the setting of the "Relay characteristics" and "Invert status response" parameters.
Pos: 27.74 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/SchaltaktorApp. - Schaltaktorapplikation - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269514450016_15.docx @ 53240 @ @ 1
Switch actuator application objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switch object
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
1
Status response signal
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
Pos: 27.75 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 51
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.76 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Bewegungsmelder @ 15\mod_1289224598389_15.docx @ 96991 @ 2 @ 1
11.30
Movement detector
Pos: 27.77 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/BewegungsmelderApp. - Bewegungsmelder - DIN-A4 @ 19\mod_1321427323663_15.docx @ 109953 @ @ 1
The "Movement detector" application can trigger telegrams on the bus when a movement is detected in the detection range.
Telegrams can also be sent on the bus when telegrams are received on the 1-bit communication object "External pushbutton input". This means that a device can be activated by additional KNX devices as if a movement was detected. The time
for sending out a telegram depends especially on the operating mode that has been set. The movement detector has
available the operating modes "Message", "Automatic switch-off", "Automatic switch-on" or "Automatic".
In the "Message" mode the movement detector is in the position to send telegrams cyclically on the "Start movement" 1-bit
communication object.
In the "Automatic switch-off" mode the movement detector must be switched on manually via the receipt of an ON telegram
on the "External push-button input" object. The device switches off after the set switch-off delay beginning from the most
recent detection or manually.
In "Automatic switch-on" mode the movement detector switches on automatically when detecting a movement. It switches off
at the receipt of an OFF telegram on the "External push-button input" object.
Note: The movement detector switches off automatically after 6 hours.
In the "Automatic" mode the movement detector switches on automatically when detecting a movement. It switches off after
the specified switch-off delay beginning from the most recent detection or through the receipt of an OFF telegram on the
"External push-button input" object. When switching off manually the detection of movement is suppressed for the
parameterised pause time via the internal sensor.
The movement detector can be activated permanently via the "Switchover of external push-button input" 1-bit communication
object. The function can, for example, be used during cleaning actions to cause all movement detectors to activate
themselves even when no movement was detected.
If a movement detector works in an operating mode with switch-off delay, this can be adjusted during operation via a
separate communication object. This would allow different switch-off delays to be used for mornings and for evenings.
The behaviour can be adjusted after the return of bus voltage so that no undefined state arises after a bus voltage failure
and subsequent return of bus voltage.
The movement detector can be blocked via an enable object.
The movement detector can switch brightness-dependent or brightness-independent. The setting parameters can be used to
adjust the threshold value of the light sensor. The brightness switching threshold can also be adjusted via communication
objects via the bus.
52 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Movement detector objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Enable
1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
1
Switch-off delay
2 byte / DPT 7.005
C, W, U
2
Extension unit input
1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
3
Input actuator status
1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
4
Detection independent of brightness
1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
5
External brightness
2 byte EIS 5 / DPT 9.004
C, W, U
6
External brightness threshold
2 byte EIS 5 / DPT 9.004
C, W, U
7
Internal brightness threshold
1 byte EIS 5 / DPT 9.004
C, W, U
8
LED output
1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
9
Switching movement
1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
9
Switching movement
1 byte EIS 5 / DPT 5.001
C, T
9
Switching movement
1 byte EIS 6 / DPT 5.010
C, T
10
Starting movement
1 byte EIS 1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
11
Switchover of external push-button input
1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
13
External push-button input
1 bit EIS 1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
Pos: 27.78 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 53
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.79 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/LED-Funktion @ 9\mod_1269508367126_15.docx @ 53030 @ 2 @ 1
11.31
LED function
Pos: 27.80 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/LedApp. - LED-Funktion - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269508113996_15.docx @ 53025 @ @ 1
With the "LED function" application, the LED of the rocker can be used for orientation lighting, for status indication or for
function display. The LED can light up in different colours. The LED can also flash for alarm display and/or scene storage
display.
LED function objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Status (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
0
Status (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Bit EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, U
1
Day / Night mode (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
2
Proximity (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
3
Alarm (DPT_Alarm)
1 Bit / DPT_Alarm
C, W, U
4
Scene storage (DPT_Scene_Control)
1 Byte / DPT 18.001
C, W, U
Pos: 27.81 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Alarmfunktion @ 9\mod_1269508521119_15.docx @ 53071 @ 2 @ 1
11.32
Alarm function
If the alarm function is switched active, the LED can be made to flash (1 Hz) during the status or function display via a 1-bit
"Alarm" communication object.
The LED will flash if an ON telegram is received on a 1-bit "Alarm" communication object. If the object receives an OFF
telegram, the LED will no longer flash.
The LED always flashes in the same colour and brightness that was specified via the status function or function display.
The alarm function could, for example, be used to display a wind alarm to the user to let the user know that no blind
operation is possible at that time. An additional application would be the signalling of an open door when the user would like
to lower a roller blind.
Hint:
If the LED is currently serving as an orientation light, it will not flash. This also applies if it is switched to orientation lighting
during flashing, i.e. the LED stops flashing immediately.
Pos: 27.82 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Busch-priOn/ApplikationsbeschreibungenApp. - Alarmfunktion - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269508449466_15.docx @ 53056 @ @ 1
Pos: 27.83 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Speicherfunktion Lichtszenen @ 9\mod_1269508749593_15.docx @ 53082 @ 2 @ 1
11.33
Light scene memory function
If the "Light scene memory function" is switched active, the LED can be made to flash (3 Hz) via a 1-bit communication
object "Scene storage" during the status or function display.
If a scene storage telegram is received on the 1-byte communication object "Scene storage", the LED will blink for 3 s and
then stop blinking automatically.
The LED always flashes in the same colour and brightness that is specified via the status function or function display.
Hint:
If the LED is currently serving as an orientation light, it will not blink. This also applies if orientation illumination is switched
to during flashing.
Pos: 27.84 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/LichtszenenaktorApp. - Speicherfunktion Lichtszenen - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269508652816_15.docx @ 53077 @ @ 1
Pos: 27.85 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
54 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.86 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/U - Z/Verzögerung @ 9\mod_1269509457458_15.docx @ 53093 @ 2 @ 1
11.34
Delay
Pos: 27.87 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/VerzoegerungApp. - Verzögerung - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269508848356_15.docx @ 53088 @ @ 1
Telegrams can be received via the "Input" object using the "Delay" application. The telegrams received are sent out on the
"Output" object with a set delay time.
The object types for "Input" and "Output" can be collectively parameterised for different applications.
Delay objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Input (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
0
Input (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, W
0
Input (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007
C, W
0
Input (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W
0
Input (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W
0
Input (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W
0
Input (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W
0
Input (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W
0
Input (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W
0
Input (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W
0
Input (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W
1
Output (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
1
Output (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, T
1
Output (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.007
C, T
1
Output (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
1
Output (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, T
1
Output (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, T
1
Output (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, T
1
Output (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, T
1
Output (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, T
1
Output (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, T
1
Output (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, T
2
Delay time (2 Byte)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, R, W
Pos: 27.88 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 55
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.89 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Treppenhauslicht @ 9\mod_1269509802172_15.docx @ 53113 @ 2 @ 1
11.35
Staircase lighting
Pos: 27.90 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Treppenhauslicht/App. - Treppenhauslicht - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269509557128_15.docx @ 53098 @ @ 1
With the "Staircase lighting" application, switching telegrams or value telegrams can be provided with a light-on time.
Depending on the parameterisation, the application shows different communication objects:
– a 1-bit object for input and output
If an ON telegram is received via the "Input/Output" object, the light-on time is started immediately. This can be a lighton time of 00:10 min to 88:45 min, which is adjustable in 0.1 s steps. After expiration of the light-on time, the
"Input/Output" object sends an OFF telegram.
– two 1-bit objects for input and output
– two 1-byte objects for input and output
If a telegram is received via the "Input" object, the light-on time is started immediately and a telegram with the same
value of the telegram received on the input is sent out on the "Output" object. This can be a light-on time of 00:10 min to
88:45 min, which is adjustable in 0.1 s steps. After expiration of the light-on time, the "Output" object sends out an OFF
telegram (1-bit) or a telegram with the value "0" (1-byte).
Via two additional communication objects, it is possible to specify the light-on time and the switch-off prewarning time.
The 2-byte values received are written to the memory of the device and are retained even after a bus power failure and
subsequent return of voltage.
Staircase lighting objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Input (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
0
Input (1 Byte)
1 Bit EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W
0
Input_Output (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
1
Light-on time (2 Byte)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, R, W
2
Switch-off pre-warning
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, R, W
3
Output (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
3
Output (1 Byte)
1 Bit EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, T
Pos: 27.91 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
56 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.92 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Lichtszenenaktor @ 9\mod_1269510610443_15.docx @ 53133 @ 2 @ 1
11.36
Light scene actuator
Pos: 27.93 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Lichtszenenaktor/App. - Lichtszenenaktor - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269509871874_15.docx @ 53118 @ @ 1
With the "Light scene actuator" application, it is possible to call up scenes that are stored in the device via the receipt of a
scene number on the 1-byte communication object "Scene call-up". A maximum of eight scenes with up to eight actuator
objects can be created.
For triggering different actuators, the size of the actuator groups communication objects can be set under the "Actuator
group type" parameter.
The user has the option of saving the scenes himself. A corresponding save telegram must be received for this (see the
description of the individual parameters).
Light scene actuator objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
1…10
Light scene call-up (1 Byte)
1 Byte / DPT18.001
C, W, U
Actuator group A [B…J] (1-bit switching)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
1…10
Actuator group A [B…J] (1-bit Venetian blind)
1 Bit EIS7 / DPT 1.008
C, W, T, U
1…10
Actuator group A [B…J] (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
1…10
Actuator group A [B…J] (1-byte light scene number)
1 Byte / DPT 18.001
C, W, T, U
1…10
Actuator group A [B…J] (Temperature value absolute)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001
C, W, T, U
10…19
Enable scene 1 [Scene 2 … Scene 10]
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
Pos: 27.94 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Sequenz @ 9\mod_1269511034750_15.docx @ 53143 @ 2 @ 1
11.37
Sequence
Pos: 27.95 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Sequenz/App. - Sequenz - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269510677004_15.docx @ 53138 @ @ 1
With the "Sequence " application it is possible to send out multiple telegrams with different values in a predefined sequence
consecutively over the same object.
In contrast to the scene, the "Sequence" application has only one communication object on which up to twelve individual
values are consecutively sent in twelve firmly set times. The times can be freely set from 1 s to 12 h. The "Sequence"
application lends itself to controlling showrooms for example.
The function can be temporarily blocked via an enable object.
Sequence objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Sequence value (1-bit switching)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T, U
0
Sequence value (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W, T, U
0
Sequence value (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T, U
0
Sequence value (1-byte light scene number)
1 Byte / DPT 18.001
C, W, T, U
0
Sequence value (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W, T, U
0
Sequence value (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W, T, U
1
Sequence start
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
2
Sequence status
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
4
Enable
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
Pos: 27.96 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 57
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.97 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/Preset @ 10\mod_1269511326199_15.docx @ 53153 @ 2 @ 1
11.38
Preset
The "Preset" application makes an input and output communication object available. At the receipt of a switching telegram
on the 1-bit input object, a telegram is immediately sent out on the 1-byte output object. A preset percent value or,
alternatively, a light scene number can be sent out.
Pos: 27.98 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Preset/App. - Preset - DIN-A4 @ 9\mod_1269511150514_15.docx @ 53148 @ @ 1
Preset objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Input (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
0
Output (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
0
Output (1-byte light scene number)
1 Byte / DPT 18.001
C, T
Pos: 27.99 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Telegramm zyklisch @ 10\mod_1269511714991_15.docx @ 53163 @ 2 @ 1
11.39
Cyclic telegram
Pos: 27.100 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Telegramm zyklisch/App. - Telegramm zyklisch - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269511411745_15.docx @ 53158 @ @ 1
Via the "Cyclic telegram" application and after receipt of a telegram on the "Input" object, a telegram with the same volume is
cyclically sent out on the "Cyclic output" object.
The object types for "Input" and "Output" can be collectively parameterised for the different applications.
The times for cyclic sending on the "Output" object are adjustable.
Via an additional "Enable" object, there is the option of temporarily blocking the function.
Cyclic telegram objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Input (1-bit switching)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
0
Input (1-bit alarm)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
0
Input (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W
0
Input (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W
0
Input (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W
0
Input (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W
0
Input (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W
0
Input (2-byte temperature)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001
C, W
0
Input (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W
0
Input (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W
0
Input (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W
1
Output (1-bit switching)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
1
Output (1-bit alarm)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
1
Output (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
1
Output (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, T
1
Output (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, T
1
Output (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, T
1
Output (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, T
1
Output (2-byte temperature)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.001
C, T
1
Output (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, T
1
Output (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, T
1
Output (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, T
2
Enable
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
Pos: 27.101 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
58 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.102 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/A - F/Blinken @ 10\mod_1269511888317_15.docx @ 53173 @ 2 @ 1
11.40
Flashing
Pos: 27.103 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Blinken/App. - Blinken - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269511782600_15.docx @ 53168 @ @ 1
In order to trigger a flashing sequence on the output object, a telegram must be received on the input object beforehand.
The "Flashing" parameter specifies whether the flashing sequence is started with an ON or an OFF telegram on the input
object. Alternatively, the flashing sequence can be also be started with a "Change of state", i.e. if the input signal switches
from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0".
Flashing objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Input
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
1
Output
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
Flags
Pos: 27.104 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/G - L/Logik @ 10\mod_1270535021890_15.docx @ 53458 @ 2 @ 1
11.41
Logic
Pos: 27.105 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Logik/App. - Logik - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1270534383703_15.docx @ 53453 @ @ 1
Logic objects
No.
Object name
Data type
0
Output (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, T
0
Output (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, T
1
Input 1 (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
1
Input 1 (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
2
Input 2 (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
2
Input 2 (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
3
Input 3 (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
3
Input 3 (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
4
Input 4 (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
4
Input 4 (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
5
Input 5 (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
5
Input 5 (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
6
Input 6 (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
6
Input 6 (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
7
Input 7 (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
7
Input 7 (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
8
Input 8 (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
8
Input 8 (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
9
Input 9 (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
9
Input 9 (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
10
Input 10 (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W, U
10
Input 10 (1 Byte)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W, U
Pos: 27.106 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 59
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.107 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Tor @ 10\mod_1269512122627_15.docx @ 53183 @ 2 @ 1
11.42
Gate
Pos: 27.108 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Tor/App. - Tor - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269511957207_15.docx @ 53178 @ @ 1
The "Gate" application allows specific signals to be filtered and the signal flow to be temporarily blocked. The function has
three communication objects: "Control input", "Input" and "Output".
The input or output object can assume different sizes.
The bit size can be freely assigned with the "Not assigned" setting. This means that the first internal or external group
address/action that is assigned and already connected to some other communication object will specify the size.
The control can occur from "Input to output" or also from "Output to input", provided the control input allows this. Enabling
via the control input can occur via an ON or an OFF telegram.
If, for example, the "Control input" setting is set to "ON telegram", only telegrams from the input are transmitted to the
output, if prior to this the control input has received an ON telegram.
It is also possible to block signals via the "Filter function" setting. Either "nothing is filtered out" or the signal "ON is filtered
out" or the signal "OFF is filtered out". This function is always necessary, for example, when only the ON telegram is
interesting for a sensor and the sensor does not offer any filter function in its application program.
Gate objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Input
-
C, W, T
1
Output
-
C, W, T
2
Control input
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
Pos: 27.109 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
60 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.110 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/M - O/Min- / Maxwertgeber @ 10\mod_1269512699231_15.docx @ 53194 @ 2 @ 1
11.43
Min/Max value transducer
Pos: 27.111 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Powertool 2/App/MinMaxApp. - Min- / Maxwertgeber - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269512210610_15.docx @ 53189 @ @ 1
Up to eight input values can be compared with each other using the "Min/max value transducer" application. The application
can output the highest input value, the smallest input value or the average of all input values on the output.
The size of the input objects, and with it also the size of the output object can be adapted for the most diverse applications.
You can select from the following object types:
– 1-byte 0..100 %, for comparison of percent values
– 1-byte 0..255, for the comparison of decimal values between 0 and 255
– 2-byte float, for the comparison of 2-byte floating point values (physical values such as temperature, brightness value
etc.)
– 2-byte signed, for the comparison of decimal values between -32,768 and +32,767
– 2-byte unsigned, for the comparison of decimal values between 0 and 65,535
– 4-byte float, for the comparison of 4-byte floating point values (physical values such as acceleration, electrical current,
work etc.)
– 4-byte signed, for the comparison of decimal values between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647
– 4-byte unsigned, for the comparison of decimal values between 0 and 4,294,967,295
Hint:
With whole numbers the average value is rounded.
Min/Max value transducer objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Output (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
0
Output (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, T
0
Output (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, T
0
Output (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, T
0
Output (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, T
0
Output (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, T
0
Output (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, T
0
Output (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, T
1…10
Input 1 [2…10] (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W
C, W
1…10
Input 1 [2…10] (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
1…10
Input 1 [2…10] (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W
1…10
Input 1 [2…10] (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W
1…10
Input 1 (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W
1…10
Input 1 [2…10] (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W
1…10
Input 1 [2…10] (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W
1…10
Input 1 [2…10] (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W
Pos: 27.112 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 61
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 27.113 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Modul-Struktur/Online-Dokumentation/Überschriften/2. Ebene/S - T/Schwellwert / Hysterese @ 10\mod_1269513105197_15.docx @ 53204 @ 2 @ 1
11.44
Threshold value / hysteresis
Pos: 27.114 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Schwellwert / Hysterese/App. - Schwellwert / Hysterese - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269512775480_15.docx @ 53199 @ @ 1
With the "Threshold value / Hysteresis" application, value telegrams can be received on an input communication object and
compared with threshold values specified in the device.
Predefined values are sent out on the communication "Output" communication object if the upper or lower thresholds are
exceeded. The size of the object can be adjusted for different applications.
The function can be temporarily blocked via an enable object.
If the value of the lower threshold lies above the value for the upper threshold, the function is not executed.
Threshold value / hysteresis objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Input (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, W
0
Input (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, W
0
Input (2 Byte Float)
2 Byte EIS5 / DPT 9.xxx
C, W
0
Input (2 Byte Signed)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 8.001
C, W
0
Input (2 Byte Unsigned)
2 Byte EIS10 / DPT 7.001
C, W
0
Input (4 Byte Float)
4 Byte EIS9 / DPT 14.xxx
C, W
0
Input (4 Byte Signed)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 12.001
C, W
0
Input (4 Byte Unsigned)
4 Byte EIS11 / DPT 13.001
C, W
1
Output (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
1
Output (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
1
Output (1 Byte 0..255)
1 Byte EIS14 / DPT 5.010
C, T
2
Enable
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
Pos: 27.115 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/PWM-Umsetzer @ 10\mod_1269513496522_15.docx @ 53214 @ 2 @ 1
11.45
PWM inverter
Pos: 27.116 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/PWM/App. - PWM-Umsetzer - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269513222290_15.docx @ 53209 @ @ 1
With the "PWM inverter" application, a 1-byte input signal can be converted to a 1-bit signal or a 1-byte signal via an
equivalent pulse-width modulation. This function is required, for instance, if a room temperature controller issues a constant
control value that controls a switching heating actuator (for electrothermal actuating drives).
The function of the 1-byte sized activation is required if the room temperature controller can only send out constant control
values or a constant control value is required for other functions (such as central supply line temperature control).
There is the option of activating a force-position. The force-position is used for certain events such as the opening of a
window or for moving a heating actuator that is to be activated to a specific position for the dew point alarm.
If "Alert" is activated, the additional communication object "Fault" is available. A fault will then occur if the "Input" object has
received no further telegram within a certain period of time. Possible reasons for this could be, for example, that the
associated room temperature controller fails or that during a cross-line function the telegrams no longer pass the coupler. In
this case an ON telegram is sent out on the "Fault" communication object and the "Input" object assumes the "Value for
fault".
An additional "Enable" object provides the option of temporarily blocking the function.
PWM transducer objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Input (1 Byte)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
1
Output (1 Bit)
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
1
Output (1 Byte 0..100 %)
1 Byte EIS6 / DPT 5.001
C, T
2
Enable
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
3
Fault
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
4
Force-position
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
Pos: 27.117 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Spezial/Neues Layout 2010/Steuermodule_Neues_Layout_2010/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
62 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 27.118 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/Überschriften/2. Ebene/P - R/Priorität @ 10\mod_1269513770958_15.docx @ 53224 @ 2 @ 1
11.46
Priority
Pos: 27.119 /#Entwicklung Struktur ab 2014-10-11#/#Altstruktur#/KNX/Applikationsbeschreibungen/Applikationen - App/Prioritaet/App. - Priorität - DIN-A4 @ 10\mod_1269513570444_15.docx @ 53219 @ @ 1
The "Priority" application has 3 communication objects, a 1-bit object "Switch input", a 2-bit object "Input priority" and a 1-bit
object "Output". The telegrams received on the "Switch input" are transferred to the "Output" depending on the state of the
"Input priority" object.
The 2-bit object "Input priority" can receive and differentiate between four different values (0, 1, 2 and 3). Here, the "Output"
object is positively driven. Three different states are differentiated:
– "Input priority" has value "3": the value that is present on "Switch input" has no meaning. The "Output" is switched to
positively driven and has the value "1".
– "Input priority" has the value "2". The value that is present on "Switch input" has no meaning. The "Output" is switched
off positively driven and has the value "0".
– "Input priority" has the value "1" or "0". The "Output" is not positively driven. The "Switch input" is linked to the status bit
of the priority object OR and transferred to the "Output".
During a positive drive, changes of the "Switch input" object are saved, even if the current state on the "Output" object does
not immediately change through this. If the positive drive is terminated, a telegram transmission on the "Output" occurs
according to the current value of the "Switch input" object.
Priority objects
No.
Object name
Data type
Flags
0
Switch input
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, W
1
Priority input
2 Bit EIS8 / DPT 2.001
C, W
2
Output
1 Bit EIS1 / DPT 1.001
C, T
Pos: 28 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Steuermodule - Online-Dokumentation (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 63
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 29 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Überschriften (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/1. Ebene/A - F/Applikations-/Parameterbeschreibungen RTR 6351/08-825 + 6344-101 -- ABB @ 41\mod_1422555479069_15.docx @ 332020 @ 1 @ 1
12
Pos: 30.1 /DinA-4 -- Online/1.1
Description of applications/parameters for room temperature control
6351/08-825 + 6344-101 [from update version 0.1.6.0
Überschrift/Applikations-/Parameterbeschreibungen/Applikation „RTR“ @ 41\mod_1422458625557_15.docx @ 329699 @ 2 @ 1
12.1
12.1.1
Application "RTC"
General - Device function
Pos: 30.2 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleAllgemein — Gerätefunktion @ 40\mod_1421678635501_15.docx @ 312393 @ 3 @ 1
Options:
Single device
Master device
Slave device
–
Single device: The device is used singly in a room as room temperature controller.
–
Master device: At least two room temperature controllers are located in one room. One device is to be
set up as a master device, while the others are to be programmed as slave devices / temperature
sensors. The master device is to be linked to the slave devices using the appropriately labelled
communication objects. The master device regulates the temperature.
–
Slave device/temperature sensor: At least two room temperature controllers are located in one room.
One device is to be set up as a master device, while the others are to be programmed as slave
devices / temperature sensors. The slave devices are to be linked to the master device with the
appropriately labelled communication objects. The slave device serves the room temperature control
functions of the master.
Pos: 30.3 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleAllgemein — Reglerfunktion @ 40\mod_1421678818959_15.docx @ 312408 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.2
General - Control function
Options:
Heating
Heating with additional stage
Cooling
Cooling with additional stage
Heating and cooling
Heating and cooling with additional stage
–
Heating: For operating a heat-based automatic single-room control. The temperature is regulated to
the setpoint value defined in the parameter. The "Controller type" and "Heating type" can be
programmed for optimal control.
–
Heating with additional stage: In addition to the control function described under heating, the additional
stage enables the activation of an additional heating circuit. This type of additional stage is used, for
example, to quickly heat up a bathroom with floor heating via a heated towel rack.
–
Cooling: For operating a cooling-based automatic single-room control. The temperature is regulated to
the setpoint value defined in the parameter. The "Controller type" and "Cooling type" can be
programmed for optimal control.
–
Cooling with additional stage: In addition to the control function described under cooling, the additional
stage enables the activation of an additional cooling device. This type of additional stage is used, for
example, to quickly cool a room via an added cooling device.
–
Heating and cooling: For operating a two-wire or four-wire system used to heat or cool a room.
Switching between heating and cooling takes place using a central switch (two-wire system) or is
carried out manually and / or automatically via the single room temperature controller (four-wire
system).
64 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
–
Heating and cooling with an additional stage: In addition to the heating and cooling functions, one
additional stage each with an autonomous controller type can be programmed.
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on
"Single device" or "Master device".
Pos: 30.4 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleAllgemein — Betriebsmodus nach Reset @ 40\mod_1421679113020_15.docx @ 312423 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.3
General - Operating mode after reset
Options:
Comfort
Standby
Eco mode
Cooling with additional stage
Frost/heat protection
After a reset the device will run in the operating mode after a restart until a new operating mode is set as
the result of device operation or by communication objects, as the case may be. This operating mode
should be defined during the planning phase. An improperly defined operating mode can result in a loss of
comfort or increased energy consumption.
–
Comfort: If the room temperature is not automatically lowered and the room is therefore controlled
independent of its use.
–
Standby: If the room is controlled automatically, e.g. by a presence detector, as a function of its use.
–
Eco mode: If the room is controlled automatically or manually as a function of it use.
–
Frost/heat protection: If only the building protection function is necessary in the room after a reset.
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on
"Single device" or "Master device".
Pos: 30.5 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleAllgemein — Zusätzliche Funktionen @ 40\mod_1421679254855_15.docx @ 312438 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.4
General - Additional functions
Options:
No
Yes
–
This parameter enables additional functions and communication objects, e.g. window contact and
presence detector.
Pos: 30.6 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 65
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.7 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleAllgemein — Zyklisch „In Betrieb“ senden (min @ 40\mod_1421679379156_15.docx @ 312453 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.5
General - Send cyclic "In operation" (min)
Options:
–
Setting option between 5 - 3000 minutes
The "In operation" communication object serves to inform that the controller still operates. Value "1" is
sent cyclic. This parameter is used to set the cycle for sending. If the cyclic telegram fails, the function
of the device is faulty and the air-conditioning of the room can be maintained with a forced operation.
However, for this the system and/or actuator must have "Forced operation" function.
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Additional function" parameter is set to
"Yes".
Pos: 30.8 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen @ 40\mod_1421679527075_15.docx @ 312468 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.6
Heating control
Note
Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single
device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either
"Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.9 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen — Art der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421679598913_15.docx @ 312483 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.7
Heating control - Control value type
Options:
2-point 1 bit, Off/On
2-point 1 byte, (0/100%)
PI continuous, 0-100%
PI PWM, On/Off
Fan coil
The actuation of the control valve is determined by the selection of the controller type.
–
2-Point 1 Bit, Off/On: The 2-point control is the simplest type of control. The controller switches on
when the room temperature drops below a certain level (setpoint temperature value minus hysteresis)
and switches off when a particular value (setpoint temperature value plus hysteresis) is exceeded. The
switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-bit commands.
–
2-Point 1 Byte, 0/100%: This is another two-point control as described above. In this case, however,
the switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-byte values (0% / 100%).
–
PI continuous, 0-100%: The PI controller adjusts its output value between 0% and 100% to match the
difference between the actual value and the setpoint value and enables a precise regulation of the
room temperature to the setpoint value. It sends the control value to the bus as a 1-byte value (0% 100%). To reduce the bus load, the control value is only transmitted if it has changed by a predefined
percentage in relation to the previous sent value. The control value can also be transmitted cyclically.
–
PI PWM, On/Off: This also is a PI controller. Here, the output is a 1-bit command. For this to occur, the
calculated control value is converted into a pulse-interval signal.
–
Fan coil: The fan coil controller operates like the PI continuous controller. In addition, it allows the
separate activation of the fan in the fan coil unit (e.g. fan speed levels 1 - 3).
66 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.10 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen — Art der Heizung @ 40\mod_1421679666586_15.docx @ 312498 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.8
Heating control - Heating type
Options:
PI continuous, 0 – 100% and PI PWM, On/Off:
■
Area (e.g. floor heating) 4°C 200 min
■
Convector (e.g. heater) 1.5°C 100 min
■
Free configuration
Fan coil:
■
Fan coil 4°C 90 min
■
Free configuration
Multiple heating types (panel heating, convector heating or fan coil) with preset parameters are available
to the user.
–
If the required heating type is not available, individual parameters can be specified in free
configuration.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.11 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen — P-Anteil (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421679772900_15.docx @ 312513 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.9
Heating control - P-component (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 10 - 100
The P-component refers to the proportional band of a control. It fluctuates around the setpoint value and
can be used to influence control speed with a PI controller. The smaller the setpoint, the faster it reacts to
the control. However, to avoid the risk of an overshoot, this value should not be set too low. A Pcomponent from 0.1 to 25.5 K can be set.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the
"Heating type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".
Pos: 30.12 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 67
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.13 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen — I-Anteil (min.) @ 40\mod_1421679855627_15.docx @ 312528 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.10
Heating control - I-component (min.)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The I-component refers to the reset time of a control. The integral component has the effect of moving the
room temperature slowly toward, and ultimately reaching, the setpoint value. Depending on the type of
system used, the reset time has to have different values. In general, the more inactive the overall system,
the greater the reset time.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the
"Heating type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".
Pos: 30.14 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Heizen — Erweiterte Einstellungen @ 40\mod_1421679921896_15.docx @ 312543 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.11
Heating control - Extended settings
Options:
No
Yes
–
This parameter enables additional functions and communication objects, e.g. "Basic stage heating".
Pos: 30.15 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen @ 40\mod_1421679979210_15.docx @ 312558 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.12
Basic stage heating
Note
Only available when the "Extended settings" parameter under "Heating control" is
set on "Yes".
Pos: 30.16 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Statusobjekt Heizen @ 40\mod_1421680039317_15.docx @ 312573 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.13
Basic stage heating - Status object heating
Options:
No
Yes
–
This parameter enables the "Status heating" communication object.
Pos: 30.17 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Wirksinn der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421680138767_15.docx @ 312588 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.14
Basic stage heating - Mode of the control value
Options:
Normal
Inverse
The mode of the control value can be used to adapt the control value to de-energised opened (normal) or
de-energised closed (inverse) valves.
–
Normal: Value 0 means "Valve closed".
–
Inverse: Value 0 means "Valve open".
68 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.18 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Hysterese (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421680196846_15.docx @ 312603 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.15
Basic stage heating - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 3 - 255
The hysteresis of the two-point controller specifies the fluctuation range of the controller around the
setpoint value. The lower switching point is located at "Setpoint value minus hysteresis" and the upper
point is at "Setpoint value plus hysteresis".
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set
either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On" or "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%".
Pos: 30.19 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Stellgrößendifferenz für Senden der Stellgröße Heizen @ 40\mod_1421680273177_15.docx @ 312618 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.16
Basic stage heating - Control value difference for sending of heating control value
Options:
2%
5%
10 %
Send cyclic only
The control values of the 0 - 100% PI continuous controller are not transmitted after every calculation.
Instead, they are transmitted when the calculation results in a value that is different enough to the
previous sent value to make a transmission meaningful. This value difference can be entered here.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.20 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Zyklisches Senden der Stellgröße (min) @ 40\mod_1421680348961_15.docx @ 312633 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.17
Basic stage heating - Cyclic sending of the control value (min)
Options:
Setting option between 1 - 60 minutes
The current control value used by the device can be cyclically transmitted to the bus.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set
either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On", "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%", "PI continuous, 0100%" or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.21 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 69
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.22 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — PWM-Zyklus Heizen (min) @ 40\mod_1421680437476_15.docx @ 312648 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.18
Basic stage heating - PWM cycle heating (min)
Options:
Setting option between 1 - 60 minutes
In PI PWM, On/off the control value percentage values are converted into a pulse-interval signal. This
means that a selected PWM cycle will be divided into an on-phase and an off-phase based on the control
value. Accordingly, a control value output of 33% in a PWM cycle of 15 min. results in an "On-phase" of
five minutes and an "Off-phase" of 10 min. The time for a PWM cycle can be specified here.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set on
"PI PWM, On/Off“.
Pos: 30.23 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Max. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421680487786_15.docx @ 312663 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.19
Basic stage heating - Maximum control value (0 - 255)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The maximum control value of the PI controller defines the maximum value outputted by the controller. If a
maximum value under 255 is chosen, the value will not be exceeded, even if the controller calculates a
higher control value.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.24 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Heizen — Grundlast min. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421680539734_15.docx @ 312678 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.20
Basic stage heating - Minimum control value for basic load (0 to 255)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The minimum control value of the PI controller defines the minimum value output by the controller. If a
minimum value greater than zero is chosen, the controller will not output a lower value, even if it calculates
a value that is lower. This parameter can be used to set a basic load, e.g. for operating floor heating. Even
if the controller calculates the control value zero, a heating medium will flow through the floor heating
system to prevent the floor from cooling down. Under "Settings of basic load", it is also possible to define
whether this basic load will be permanently active or whether it will be switched by the "Basic load" object.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.25 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen @ 40\mod_1421680662849_15.docx @ 312693 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.21
Control of additional heating stage
Note
Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single
device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either
"Heating with additional stage" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".
70 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.26 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — Art der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421680743735_15.docx @ 312708 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.22
Control of additional heating stage - Control value type
Options:
2-point 1 bit, Off/On
2-point 1 byte, (0/100%)
PI continuous, 0-100%
PI PWM, On/Off
Fan coil
The actuation of the control valve is determined by the selection of the controller type.
–
2-Point 1 Bit, Off/On: The 2-point control is the simplest type of control. The controller switches on
when the room temperature drops below a certain level (setpoint temperature value minus hysteresis)
and switches off when a particular value (setpoint temperature value plus hysteresis) is exceeded. The
switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-bit commands.
–
2-Point 1 Byte, 0/100%: This is another two-point control as described above. In this case, however,
the switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-byte values (0% / 100%).
–
PI continuous, 0-100%: The PI controller adjusts its output value between 0% and 100% to match the
difference between the actual value and the setpoint value and enables a precise regulation of the
room temperature to the setpoint value. It sends the control value to the bus as a 1-byte value (0% 100%). To reduce the bus load, the control value is only transmitted if it has changed by a predefined
percentage in relation to the previous sent value. The control value can also be transmitted cyclically.
–
PI PWM, On/Off: This also is a PI controller. Here, the output is a 1-bit command. For this to occur, the
calculated control value is converted into a pulse-interval signal.
–
Fan coil: The fan coil controller operates like the PI continuous controller. In addition, it allows the
separate activation of the fan in the fan coil unit (e.g. fan speed levels 1 - 3).
Pos: 30.27 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 71
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.28 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — Art der Zusatz-Heizung @ 40\mod_1421680844168_15.docx @ 312723 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.23
Control of additional heating stage - Additional heating type
Options:
PI continuous, 0 – 100% and PI PWM, On/Off:
■
Area (e.g. floor heating) 4°C 200 min
■Convector
■
(e.g. heater) 1.5°C 100 min
Free configuration
Fan coil:
■
Fan coil 4°C 90 min
■
Free configuration
Multiple heating types (panel heating, convector heating or fan coil) with preset parameters are available
to the user.
–
If the required heating type is not available, individual parameters can be specified in free
configuration.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.29 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — P-Anteil (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421680905289_15.docx @ 312738 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.24
Control of additional heating stage - P-component (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 10 - 100
The P-component refers to the proportional band of a control. It fluctuates around the setpoint value and
can be used to influence control speed with a PI controller. The smaller the setpoint, the faster it reacts to
the control. However, to avoid the risk of an overshoot, this value should not be set too low. A Pcomponent from 0.1 to 25.5 K can be set.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the
"Additional heating type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".
Pos: 30.30 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
72 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.31 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — I-Anteil (min.) @ 40\mod_1421681020479_15.docx @ 312753 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.25
Control of additional heating stage - P-component (min)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The I-component refers to the reset time of a control. The integral component has the effect of moving the
room temperature slowly toward, and ultimately reaching, the setpoint value. Depending on the type of
system used, the reset time has to have different values. In general, the more inactive the overall system,
the greater the reset time.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the
"Additional heating type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".
Pos: 30.32 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — Temperaturdifferenz zur Grundstufe (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421681098573_15.docx @ 312768 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.26
Control of additional heating stage - Temperature difference to basic stage (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The setpoint temperature of the additional stage is defined as a function of the current setpoint
temperature of the base stage and is expressed as a difference. The value represents the setpoint value
starting at which the additional stage will operate.
Pos: 30.33 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Heizen — Erweiterte Einstellungen @ 40\mod_1421681150380_15.docx @ 312783 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.27
Control of additional heating stage - Extended settings
Options:
No
Yes
This parameter enables additional functions and communication objects, e.g. "Additional heating stage".
Pos: 30.34 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen @ 40\mod_1421681202812_15.docx @ 312798 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.28
Additional heating stage
Note
Only available when the "Extended settings" parameter under "Control of
additional heating stage" is set on "Yes".
Pos: 30.35 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen — Wirksinn der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421681255930_15.docx @ 312813 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.29
Additional heating stage - Mode of the control value
Options:
Normal
Inverse
The mode of the control value can be used to adapt the control value to de-energised opened (normal) or
de-energised closed (inverse) valves.
–
Normal: Value 0 means "Valve closed".
–
Inverse: Value 0 means "Valve open".
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 73
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.36 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen — Hysterese (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421681324071_15.docx @ 312828 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.30
Additional heating stage - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 3 - 255
The hysteresis of the two-point controller specifies the fluctuation range of the controller around the
setpoint value. The lower switching point is located at "Setpoint value minus hysteresis" and the upper
point is at "Setpoint value plus hysteresis".
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set
either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On" or "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%".
Pos: 30.37 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen — Stellgrößendifferenz für Senden der Stellgröße Heizen @ 40\mod_1421681431586_15.docx @ 312843 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.31
Additional heating stage - Control value difference for sending of heating control value
Options:
2%
5%
10 %
Send cyclic only
The control values of the 0 - 100% PI continuous controller are not transmitted after every calculation.
Instead, they are transmitted when the calculation results in a value that is different enough to the
previous sent value to make a transmission meaningful. This value difference can be entered here.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.38 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
74 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.39 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen — Zyklisches Senden der Stellgröße (min) @ 40\mod_1421681495047_15.docx @ 312858 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.32
Additional heating stage - Cyclic sending of the control value (min)
Options:
Setting option between 1 - 60 minutes
The current control value used by the device can be cyclically transmitted to the bus.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set
either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On", "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%", "PI continuous, 0100%" or "Fan coil".
Additional heating stage - Maximum control value (0 - 255)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The maximum control value of the PI controller defines the maximum value outputted by the controller. If a
maximum value under 255 is chosen, the value will not be exceeded, even if the controller calculates a
higher control value.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.40 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleZusatzstufe Heizen — Grundlast min. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421681560021_15.docx @ 312873 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.33
Additional heating stage - Minimum control value for basic load (0 - 255)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The minimum control value of the PI controller defines the minimum value output by the controller. If a
minimum value greater than zero is chosen, the controller will not output a lower value, even if it calculates
a value that is lower. This parameter can be used to set a basic load, e.g. for operating floor heating. Even
if the controller calculates the control value zero, a heating medium will flow through the floor heating
system to prevent the floor from cooling down. Under "Settings of basic load", it is also possible to define
whether this basic load will be permanently active or whether it will be switched by the "Basic load" object.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.41 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 75
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.42 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421681625088_15.docx @ 312888 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.34
Cooling control
Note
Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single
device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either
"Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.43 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen — Art der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421681679485_15.docx @ 312903 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.35
Cooling control - Control value type
Options:
2-point 1 bit, Off/On
2-point 1 byte, (0/100%)
PI continuous, 0-100%
PI PWM, On/Off
Fan coil
The actuation of the control valve is determined by the selection of the controller type.
–
2-Point 1 Bit, Off/On: The 2-point control is the simplest type of control. The controller switches on
when the room temperature drops below a certain level (setpoint temperature value minus hysteresis)
and switches off when a particular value (setpoint temperature value plus hysteresis) is exceeded. The
switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-bit commands.
–
2-Point 1 Byte, 0/100%: This is another two-point control as described above. In this case, however,
the switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-byte values (0% / 100%).
–
PI continuous, 0-100%: The PI controller adjusts its output value between 0% and 100% to match the
difference between the actual value and the setpoint value and enables a precise regulation of the
room temperature to the setpoint value. It sends the control value to the bus as a 1-byte value (0% 100%). To reduce the bus load, the control value is only transmitted if it has changed by a predefined
percentage in relation to the previous sent value. The control value can also be transmitted cyclically.
–
PI PWM, On/Off: This also is a PI controller. Here, the output is a 1-bit command. For this to occur, the
calculated control value is converted into a pulse-interval signal.
–
Fan coil: The fan coil controller operates like the PI continuous controller. In addition, it allows the
separate activation of the fan in the fan coil unit (e.g. fan speed levels 1 - 3).
Pos: 30.44 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
76 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.45 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen — Art der Kühlung @ 40\mod_1421681777953_15.docx @ 312918 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.36
Cooling control - Cooling type
Options:
PI continuous, 0 – 100% and PI PWM, On/Off:
■
Area (e.g. cooling ceiling) 5°C 240 min
■
Free configuration
Fan coil:
■
Fan coil 4°C 90 min
■
Free configuration
Two cooling types (area or fan coil) with preset parameters are available to the user.
If the required cooling type is not available, individual parameters can be specified in free configuration.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.46 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen — P-Anteil (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421681863004_15.docx @ 312933 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.37
Cooling control - P-component (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 10 - 100
The P-component refers to the proportional band of a control. It fluctuates around the setpoint value and
can be used to influence control speed with a PI controller. The smaller the setpoint, the faster it reacts to
the control. However, to avoid the risk of an overshoot, this value should not be set too low. A Pcomponent from 0.1 to 25.5 K can be set.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the
"Cooling type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".
Pos: 30.47 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen — I-Anteil (min.) @ 40\mod_1421681956588_15.docx @ 312948 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.38
Cooling control - I-component (min.)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The I-component refers to the reset time of a control. The integral component has the effect of moving the
room temperature slowly toward, and ultimately reaching, the setpoint value. Depending on the type of
system used, the reset time has to have different values. In general, the more inactive the overall system,
the greater the reset time.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the
"Cooling type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 77
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.48 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Kühlen — Erweiterte Einstellungen @ 40\mod_1421682034557_15.docx @ 312963 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.39
Cooling control - Extended settings
Options:
No
Yes
This parameter enables additional functions and communication objects, e.g. "Basic stage cooling".
Pos: 30.49 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421682149404_15.docx @ 312978 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.40
Basic stage cooling
Note
Only available when the "Extended settings" parameter under "Cooling control" is
set on "Yes".
Pos: 30.50 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Statusobjekt Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421682228449_15.docx @ 312993 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.41
Basic stage cooling - Status object cooling
Options:
No
Yes
This parameter enables the "Status cooling" communication object.
Pos: 30.51 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Wirksinn der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421682294859_15.docx @ 313008 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.42
Basic stage cooling - Mode of the control value
Options:
Normal
Inverse
The mode of the control value can be used to adapt the control value to de-energised opened (normal) or
de-energised closed (inverse) valves.
–
Normal: Value 0 means "Valve closed".
–
Inverse: Value 0 means "Valve open".
78 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.52 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Hysterese (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421682384527_15.docx @ 313023 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.43
Basic stage cooling - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 3 - 255
The hysteresis of the two-point controller specifies the fluctuation range of the controller around the
setpoint value. The lower switching point is located at "Setpoint value minus hysteresis" and the upper
point is at "Setpoint value plus hysteresis".
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set
either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On" or "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%".
Basic stage cooling - Control value difference for sending of cooling control value
Options:
2%
5%
10 %
Send cyclic only
The control values of the 0 - 100% PI continuous controller are not transmitted after every calculation.
Instead, they are transmitted when the calculation results in a value that is different enough to the
previous sent value to make a transmission meaningful. This value difference can be entered here.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.53 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Zyklisches Senden der Stellgröße (min) @ 40\mod_1421682458300_15.docx @ 313038 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.44
Basic stage cooling - Cyclic sending of the control value (min)
Options:
Setting option between 1 - 60 minutes
The current control value used by the device can be cyclically transmitted to the bus.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set
either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On", "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%", "PI continuous, 0100%" or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.54 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 79
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.55 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421682149404_15.docx @ 312978 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.45
Basic stage cooling
Note
Only available when the "Extended settings" parameter under "Cooling control" is
set on "Yes".
Pos: 30.56 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Max. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421682605860_15.docx @ 313068 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.46
Basic stage cooling - Maximum control value (0 - 255)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The maximum control value of the PI controller defines the maximum value outputted by the controller. If a
maximum value under 255 is chosen, the value will not be exceeded, even if the controller calculates a
higher control value.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.57 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleGrundstufe Kühlen — Grundlast min. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421682745449_15.docx @ 313083 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.47
Basic stage cooling - Minimum control value for basic load (0 to 255)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The minimum control value of the PI controller defines the minimum value output by the controller. If a
minimum value greater than zero is chosen, the controller will not output a lower value, even if it calculates
a value that is lower. This parameter can be used to set a basic load, e.g. for operating surface cooling.
Even if the controller calculates the control value zero, a cooling medium will flow through the cooling area
to prevent the floor from heating up. Under "Settings of basic load", it is also possible to define whether
this basic load will be permanently active or whether it will be switched by the "Basic load" object.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.58 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
80 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.59 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421682843651_15.docx @ 313098 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.48
Control of additional cooling stage
Note
Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single
device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either
"Cooling with additional stage" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".
Options:
2-point 1 bit, Off/On
2-point 1 byte, (0/100%)
PI continuous, 0-100%
PI PWM, On/Off
Fan coil
The actuation of the control valve is determined by the selection of the controller type.
–
2-Point 1 Bit, Off/On: The 2-point control is the simplest type of control. The controller switches on
when the room temperature drops below a certain level (setpoint temperature value minus hysteresis)
and switches off when a particular value (setpoint temperature value plus hysteresis) is exceeded. The
switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-bit commands.
–
2-Point 1 Byte, 0/100%: This is another two-point control as described above. In this case, however,
the switch-on and switch-off commands are transmitted as 1-byte values (0% / 100%).
–
PI continuous, 0-100%: The PI controller adjusts its output value between 0% and 100% to match the
difference between the actual value and the setpoint value and enables a precise regulation of the
room temperature to the setpoint value. It sends the control value to the bus as a 1-byte value (0% 100%). To reduce the bus load, the control value is only transmitted if it has changed by a predefined
percentage in relation to the previous sent value. The control value can also be transmitted cyclically.
–
PI PWM, On/Off: This also is a PI controller. Here, the output is a 1-bit command. For this to occur, the
calculated control value is converted into a pulse-interval signal.
–
Fan coil: The fan coil controller operates like the PI continuous controller. In addition, it allows the
separate activation of the fan in the fan coil unit (e.g. fan speed levels 1 - 3).
Pos: 30.60 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 81
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.61 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Art der Kühlung @ 40\mod_1421682941759_15.docx @ 313113 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.49
Control of additional cooling stage - Cooling type
Options:
PI continuous, 0 – 100% and PI PWM, On/Off:
■
Area (e.g. cooling ceiling) 5°C 240 min
■
Free configuration
Fan coil:
■
Fan coil 4°C 90 min
■
Free configuration
Two cooling types (area or fan coil) with preset parameters are available to the user.
If the required cooling type is not available, individual parameters can be specified in free configuration.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.62 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Kühlen — P-Anteil (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421683053736_15.docx @ 313128 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.50
Control of additional cooling stage - P-component (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 10 - 100
The P-component refers to the proportional band of a control. It fluctuates around the setpoint value and
can be used to influence control speed with a PI controller. The smaller the setpoint, the faster it reacts to
the control. However, to avoid the risk of an overshoot, this value should not be set too low. A Pcomponent from 0.1 to 25.5 K can be set.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the
"Cooling type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".
Pos: 30.63 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Kühlen — I-Anteil (min.) @ 40\mod_1421683156057_15.docx @ 313143 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.51
Control of additional cooling stage - P-component (min)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The I-component refers to the reset time of a control. The integral component has the effect of moving the
room temperature slowly toward, and to ultimately reaching, the setpoint. Depending on the type of
system used, the reset time has to have different values. In general, the more inactive the overall system,
the greater the reset time.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil". In addition, the
"Cooling type" parameter must be set on "Free configuration".
82 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.64 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/ModuleRegelung Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Erweiterte Einstellungen @ 40\mod_1421738257220_15.docx @ 313213 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.52
Control of additional cooling stage - Extended settings
Options:
No
Yes
This parameter enables additional functions and communication objects, e.g. "Additional cooling stage".
Pos: 30.65 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421738438512_15.docx @ 313228 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.53
Additional cooling stage
Note
Only available when the "Extended settings" parameter under "Control of
additional cooling stage" is set on "Yes".
Pos: 30.66 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Wirksinn der Stellgröße @ 40\mod_1421738600834_15.docx @ 313243 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.54
Additional cooling stage - Mode of the control value
Options:
Normal
Inverse
The mode of the control value can be used to adapt the control value to de-energised opened (normal) or
de-energised closed (inverse) valves.
–
Normal: Value 0 means "Valve closed".
–
Inverse: Value 0 means "Valve open".
Pos: 30.67 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Hysterese (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421738707006_15.docx @ 313258 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.55
Additional cooling stage - Hysteresis (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 3 - 255
The hysteresis of the two-point controller specifies the fluctuation range of the controller around the
setpoint value. The lower switching point is located at "Setpoint value minus hysteresis" and the upper
point is at "Setpoint value plus hysteresis".
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set
either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On" or "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%".
Pos: 30.68 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 83
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.69 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Stellgrößendifferenz für Senden der Stellgröße Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421738932127_15.docx @ 313288 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.56
Additional cooling stage - Control value difference for sending of cooling control value
Options:
2%
5%
10%
The control values of the 0 - 100% PI continuous controller are not transmitted after every calculation.
Instead, they are transmitted when the calculation results in a value that is different enough to the
previous sent value to make a transmission meaningful. This value difference can be entered here.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.70 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Zyklisches Senden der Stellgröße (min) @ 40\mod_1421739480045_15.docx @ 313304 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.57
Additional cooling stage - Cyclic sending of the control value (min)
Options:
Setting option between 1 - 60 minutes
The current control value used by the device can be cyclically transmitted to the bus.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control value type" parameter is set
either on "2-point 1 Bit, Off/On", "2-point 1 Byte, 0/100%", "PI continuous, 0100%" or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.71 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Max. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421739553533_15.docx @ 313319 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.58
Additional cooling stage - Maximum control value (0 - 255)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The maximum control value of the PI controller defines the maximum value outputted by the controller. If a
maximum value under 255 is chosen, the value will not be exceeded, even if the controller calculates a
higher control value.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.72 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
84 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.73 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen — Grundlast min. Stellgröße (0..255) @ 40\mod_1421739808226_15.docx @ 313334 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.59
Additional cooling stage - Minimum control value for basic load (0 - 255)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
The minimum control value of the PI controller defines the minimum value output by the controller. If a
minimum value greater than zero is chosen, the controller will not output a lower value, even if it calculates
a value that is lower. This parameter can be used to set a basic load, e.g. for operating surface cooling.
Even if the controller calculates the control value zero, a cooling medium will flow through the cooling area
to prevent the floor from heating up. Under "Settings of basic load", it is also possible to define whether
this basic load will be permanently active or whether it will be switched by the "Basic load" object.
Note
This parameter is only available when "Control value type" parameter is set either
on "PI continuous, 0 – 100%", "PI PWM, On/Off“ or "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.74 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Einstellungen Grundlast @ 40\mod_1421740653600_15.docx @ 313349 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.60
Settings of basic load
Note
Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single
device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either
"Heating with additional stage", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and
cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.75 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Einstellungen Grundlast — Grundlast min. Stellgröße > 0 @ 40\mod_1421740733550_15.docx @ 313364 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.61
Settings of basic load - Minimum control value for basic load > 0
Options:
Always active
Activate via object
The function finds application when in the desired area, e.g. with floor heating, the floor is to have a basic
warmth. The size of the minimum control value specifies the volume of heating medium that flows through
the controlled area, even when the calculation of the control value of the controller would indicate a lower
value.
–
Always active: Here it is possible to define whether this basic load will be permanently active or
whether it will be switched via the "Basic load" object.
–
Activate via object: When this parameter is selected, the basic load function, which means the
minimum control value with a value higher than zero, can be activated (1) or deactivated (2). If it is
activated, then the heating medium will always be fed through the system with at least the minimum
control value. If it is deactivated, the control value can be reduced to zero with the controller.
Pos: 30.76 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Kombinierter Heiz- und Kühlbetrieb @ 40\mod_1421740886633_15.docx @ 313379 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.62
Combined heating and cooling modes
Note
Only available when the "Device function" parameter is set on either "Single
device" or "Master device" and the control function parameter is set on either
"Heating and cooling" or "Heating and cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.77 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 85
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.78 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Kombinierter Heiz- und Kühlbetrieb — Umschaltung Heizen/Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421740953651_15.docx @ 313394 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.63
Combined heating and cooling modes - Switchover of heating/cooling
Options:
Automatic
Only via object
On-site/via extension unit and via object
This function makes it possible to switch between the heating and cooling mode of the device.
–
Automatic: E.g. for four-conductor systems which allow the switchover between heating and cooling at
all times. The device switches automatically between heating and cooling and to the associated
setpoint. "Switchover heating/cooling" is a transmitting object.
–
Only via object: E.g. for two-conductor systems which are operated in heating mode in the winter and
cooling mode in the summer. The switchover between heating and cooling and to the associated
setpoint is carried out via the corresponding communication object. This function is used when a
central switchover of the single room controllers is required. "Switchover heating/cooling" is a receiving
object.
–
Local/ via extension unit and via object: E.g. for four-conductor systems which allow the switchover
between heating and cooling at all times. The switchover between heating and cooling and to the
associated setpoint is carried out manually on the device by the user of the room or via the
"Switchover heating/cooling" object via the bus. "Switchover heating/cooling" is a transmitting and
receiving object.
Pos: 30.79 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Kombinierter Heiz- und Kühlbetrieb — Betriebsart nach Reset @ 40\mod_1421741049154_15.docx @ 313409 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.64
Combined heating and cooling modes - Operating mode after reset
Options:
Cooling
Heating
After a bus voltage failure, a system reset, or the attachment of a device to the bus coupler, the device
starts in the parameterized "Operating mode after reset". The operating mode can be changed when the
system is running using the options set under "Switchover heating/cooling".
Pos: 30.80 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Kombinierter Heiz- und Kühlbetrieb — Ausgabe Stellgröße Heizen und Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421741108543_15.docx @ 313424 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.65
Combined heating and cooling modes - Heating/cooling control value output
Options:
Via 1 object
Via 2 objects
This parameter is used to define whether the control value is transmitted to the climate control actuator
using one or two objects. If the climate control actuator has separate control value inputs for heating and
cooling, or if separate actuators are used, then the option "Via 2 objects" must be selected. Select the
option "Via 1 object" if a single actuator only has one object that receives both the heating and the cooling
control values.
Pos: 30.81 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
86 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.82 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Kombinierter Heiz- und Kühlbetrieb — Ausgabe Stellgröße Zusatzstufe Heizen und Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421741247539_15.docx @ 313439 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.66
Combined heating and cooling modes - Additional heating/cooling stage control value output
Options:
Via 1 object
Via 2 objects
This parameter is used to define whether the control value is transmitted to the climate control actuator
using one or two objects. If the climate control actuator has separate control value inputs for heating and
cooling, or if separate actuators are used, then the option "Via 2 objects" must be selected. Select the
option "Via 1 object" if a single actuator only has one object that receives both the heating and the cooling
control values.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Heating and cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.83 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen @ 40\mod_1421741365616_15.docx @ 313454 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.67
Setpoint settings
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either
"Single device" or "Master device".
Pos: 30.84 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Sollwert Heizen Komfort = Sollwert Kühlen Komfort @ 40\mod_1421741414381_15.docx @ 313469 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.68
Setpoint settings - Setpoint for heating comfort = setpoint for cooling comfort
Options:
No
Yes
This parameter is used to configure the manner in which the setpoint adjustment functions.
–
Yes: The device has the same setpoint for heating and cooling in the comfort mode. The system
switches to heating when the temperature drops below the setpoint minus hysteresis. It switches to
cooling when the temperature exceeds the setpoint plus hysteresis. The hysteresis is parameterizable.
–
No: The function has two separate setpoints for heating and cooling in the comfort mode. The device
will display the currently active setpoint value. Switching between heating and cooling occurs via the
"Switchover heating/cooling" parameter setting.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Heating and cooling" or "heating and cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.85 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 87
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.86 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Hysterese für Umschaltung Heizen/Kühlen (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421741480026_15.docx @ 313484 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.69
Setpoint settings - Hysteresis for switchover heating/cooling (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 5 - 100
This parameter specifies the one-sided hysteresis for switching between heating and cooling when
"Setpoint heating comfort = Setpoint cooling comfort" is active. If the room temperature exceeds the
setpoint temperature value plus hysteresis, the system switches to cooling. If the room temperature falls
below the setpoint temperature value minus hysteresis, the system switches to heating.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Setpoint heating comfort = Setpoint
cooling comfort" parameter is set on "Yes".
Pos: 30.87 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Solltemperatur Komfort Heizen und Kühlen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741566809_15.docx @ 313499 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.70
Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for heating and cooling comfort (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 10 - 40
Specifies the comfort temperature for heating and cooling when people are present.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Heating and cooling" or "heating and cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.88 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Solltemperatur Komfort Heizen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741628522_15.docx @ 313514 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.71
Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for heating comfort (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 10 - 40
Specifies the comfort temperature for heating when people are present.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Heating" or "Heating with additional stage".
Pos: 30.89 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Absenkung Standby Heizen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741705524_15.docx @ 313529 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.72
Setpoint settings - Reduction for standby heating (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 10 - 40
Specifies the temperature in heating mode when nobody is present. On devices with a display, this mode
is indicated by the standby icon.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.90 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
88 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.91 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Absenkung Eco Heizen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741763743_15.docx @ 313544 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.73
Setpoint settings - Reduction for ECO heating (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
Specifies the temperature in heating mode when nobody is present. On devices with a display, this mode
is indicated by the eco icon.
Pos: 30.92 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Solltemperatur Frostschutz (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741866594_15.docx @ 313559 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.74
Setpoint settings - Set-point temperature for frost protection (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 5 - 15
Function for protecting the building against the cold. On devices with a display, this mode is indicated by
the frost protection icon. Manual operation is blocked.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.93 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Solltemperatur Komfort Kühlen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421741954266_15.docx @ 313574 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.75
Setpoint settings - Setpoint temperature for cooling comfort (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 10 - 40
Specifies the comfort temperature for cooling when people are present.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Cooling" or "Cooling with additional stage".
Pos: 30.94 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Anhebung Standby Kühlen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421742032937_15.docx @ 313589 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.76
Setpoint settings - Increase for standby cooling (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
Specifies the temperature in cooling mode when nobody is present. On devices with a display, this mode
is indicated by the standby icon.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.95 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 89
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.96 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Anhebung Eco Kühlen (°C) @ 40\mod_1421742457725_15.docx @ 313604 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.77
Setpoint settings - Increase for ECO cooling (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
Specifies the temperature in cooling mode when nobody is present. On devices with a display, this mode
is indicated by the eco icon.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.97 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Solltemperatur Hitzeschutz (°C) @ 40\mod_1421742545048_15.docx @ 313619 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.78
Setpoint settings - Set-point temperature for heat protection (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 27 - 45
Function for protecting the building against heat. On devices with a display, this mode is indicated by the
heat protection icon. Manual operation is blocked.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.98 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Displayanzeige zeigt @ 40\mod_1421742653583_15.docx @ 313634 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.79
Setpoint settings - Display indicates
Options:
Current setpoint
Relative setpoint
The display can indicate either the absolute or relative setpoint value.
–
Current setpoint: On devices with a display, the setpoint is shown as an absolute temperature, e.g.
21.0°C.
–
Relative setpoint: On devices with display, the setpoint is indicated as a relative value, e.g. -5°C .. +
5°C.
Pos: 30.99 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — Displayanzeige zeigt @ 40\mod_1421742653583_15.docx @ 313634 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.80
Setpoint settings - Display indicates
Options:
Current setpoint
Relative setpoint
The display can indicate either the absolute or relative setpoint value.
–
Current setpoint: On devices with a display, the setpoint is shown as an absolute temperature, e.g.
21.0°C.
–
Relative setpoint: On devices with display, the setpoint is indicated as a relative value, e.g. -5°C .. +
5°C.
Pos: 30.100 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
90 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.101 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — aktuellen Sollwert senden @ 40\mod_1421742735380_15.docx @ 313649 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.81
Setpoint settings - Send current setpoint
Options:
Cyclic and during change
Only for change
The current setpoint value can be sent to the bus either cyclically and after a change, or only after a
change.
Pos: 30.102 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwerteinstellungen — zyklisches Senden der aktuellen Solltemperatur (min) @ 40\mod_1421742783023_15.docx @ 313664 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.82
Setpoint settings - Cyclic sending of the current set-point temperature (min)
Options:
Setting option between 5 - 240
This parameter is used to specify the amount of time that will elapse before the current setpoint value is
automatically transmitted.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Send current setpoint" is set on "Only
during change".
Pos: 30.103 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung @ 40\mod_1421743359507_15.docx @ 313679 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.83
Setpoint adjustment
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either
"Single device" or "Master device".
Pos: 30.104 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — max. manuelle Anhebung beim Heizbetrieb (0 - 15°C) @ 40\mod_1421743407728_15.docx @ 313694 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.84
Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual increase during heating mode (0 - 15°C)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
This preset can be used to limit the manual increase during heating.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.105 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — max. manuelle Absenkung beim Heizbetrieb (0 - 15°C) @ 40\mod_1421743479241_15.docx @ 313709 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.85
Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual reduction during heating mode (0 - 15°C)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
This preset can be used to limit the manual decrease during heating.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 91
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.106 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — max. manuelle Anhebung beim Kühlbetrieb (0 - 15°C) @ 40\mod_1421743538138_15.docx @ 313724 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.86
Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual increase during cooling mode (0 - 15°C)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
This preset can be used to limit the manual increase during cooling.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.107 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — max. manuelle Absenkung beim Kühlbetrieb (0 - 15°C) @ 40\mod_1421743637040_15.docx @ 313739 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.87
Setpoint adjustment — Maximum manual reduction during cooling mode (0 - 15°C)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
This preset can be used to limit the manual decrease during cooling.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.108 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — Zurücksetzen der manuellen Verstellung bei Empfang eines Basissollwertes @ 40\mod_1421743723193_15.docx @ 313754 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.88
Setpoint adjustment - Resetting of the manual adjustment for receipt of a basic setpoint
Options:
No
Yes
Activating this parameter will cause the manual adjustment to be deleted and the new setpoint value to be
provided when a new value is received via the "Basic setpoint" object.
If the parameter is deactivated, the manual adjustment is added to the new base setpoint value. Example:
Previous base setpoint value of 21°C + manual adjustment of 1.5°C = 22.5°C. The object receives a new
basic setpoint of 18°C plus the previous manual adjustment of 1.5°C for a total of 19.5°C.
Pos: 30.109 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
92 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.110 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — Zurücksetzen der manuellen Verstellung bei Wechsel des Betriebsmodus @ 40\mod_1421743830811_15.docx @ 313769 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.89
Setpoint adjustment - Resetting the manual adjustment for change of operating mode
Options:
No
Yes
If the device switches to a new operating mode, the manual adjustment is deleted and the parameterized
setpoint temperature for the operating mode plus any change by the base setpoint value object will be
applied if this parameter is activated. Example: Comfort temperature of 21°C plus manual adjustment of
1.5°C = 22.5°C. Change to Eco with programmed temperature 17°C. The device regulates the
temperature to 17°C, since the manual adjustment is deleted.
If the parameter is deactivated, the manual setpoint adjustment will be added to the temperature in the
new operating mode. Example: Comfort temperature of 21°C plus manual adjustment of 1.5°C = 22.5°C. If
the system switches to Eco with a parameterized temperature of 17°C, the device regulates the
temperature to 18.5°C, since the manual adjustment is added.
Pos: 30.111 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — Zurücksetzen der manuellen Verstellung über Objekt @ 40\mod_1421744043574_15.docx @ 313784 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.90
Setpoint adjustment - Resetting the manual adjustment via object
Options:
No
Yes
If this parameter is activated, a separate object can be used to delete the manual adjustment at any time.
Example of application: Resetting the manual adjustment on all devices located in a building using a
system clock.
Pos: 30.112 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sollwertverstellung — Vorortbedienung dauerhaft speichern @ 40\mod_1421744100048_15.docx @ 313799 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.91
Setpoint adjustment - Permanent storage of on-site operation
Options:
No
Yes
If this parameter is activated, the manual settings for setpoint and, where applicable, fan speed level, as
well as the value of the "Basic load" object, will be stored in the device and re-activated after a reset. If the
device is re-programmed, the stored setpoint values will also be deleted.
Pos: 30.113 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Eingänge der Temperaturerfassung @ 40\mod_1421744675480_15.docx @ 313814 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.92
Temperature reading - Inputs of temperature reading
Options:
Internal measurement
External measurement
Weighted measurement
The room temperature can be measured at the device or fed to the device by an object via the bus. In
addition, weighted measuring is also available, in which the weighted average of up to three temperature
values (1 x internal, 2 x external) is calculated and used as an input value for control.
Pos: 30.114 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 93
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.115 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Eingänge der gewichteten Temperaturerfassung @ 40\mod_1421744775118_15.docx @ 313829 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.93
Temperature reading - Inputs of weighted temperature reading
Options:
Internal and external measurement
2 x external measurement
Internal and 2x external measurement
Specifies the temperature reading inputs for the weighted measurement, in which the calculated weighted
average of the inputs is used as an input value for control
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Inputs of temperature reading"
parameter is set on "Weighted measurement".
Pos: 30.116 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Gewichtung der internen Messung (0..100%) @ 40\mod_1421744843727_15.docx @ 313844 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.94
Temperature reading - Weighting of internal measurement (0 to 100%)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
Specifies the weighting of the internal measurement at a level between 0% and 100%.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Inputs of weighted temperature
reading" parameter is set on "Internal and external measurement" or "Internal and
2x external measurement".
Pos: 30.117 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Gewichtung der externen Messung (0..100%) @ 40\mod_1421744895847_15.docx @ 313859 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.95
Temperature reading - Weighting of external measurement (0 to 100%)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
Specifies the weighting of the external measurement at a level between 0% and 100%.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Inputs of weighted temperature
reading" parameter is set on "Internal and external measurement","2x external
measurement" or "Internal and 2x external measurement".
Pos: 30.118 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Gewichtung der externen Messung 2 (0..100%) @ 40\mod_1421745031552_15.docx @ 313874 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.96
Temperature reading - Weighting of external measurement 2 (0 to 100%)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
Specifies the weighting of the external measurement 2 at a level between 0% and 100%. When added
together with the (0%...100%) weighting of the external measurement, the result must be 100%.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Inputs of weighted temperature
reading" parameter is set on "2x external measurement" or "Internal and 2x
external measurement".
Pos: 30.119 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
94 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.120 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — zyklisches Senden der aktuellen Ist-Temperatur (min) @ 40\mod_1421745118320_15.docx @ 313889 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.97
Temperature reading - Cyclic sending of the actual temperature (min)
Options:
Setting option between 5 - 240
The current actual temperature used by the device can be cyclically transmitted to the bus.
Pos: 30.121 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Wertdifferenz für das Senden der Ist-Temperatur (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421745172686_15.docx @ 313904 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.98
Temperature reading - Difference of value for sending the actual temperature (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 1 - 100
If the change in temperature exceeds the parameterized difference between the measured actual
temperature and the previous actual temperature that was sent, the changed value will be transmitted.
Pos: 30.122 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Abgleichwert für interne Temperaturmessung (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421745232216_15.docx @ 313919 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.99
Temperature reading - Adjustment value for internal temperature measurement (x 0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between 1 - 100
Every installation location has different physical conditions (interior or exterior wall, lightweight or solid
wall, etc.). In order to use the actual temperature at the installation location as a measured value for the
device, a temperature measurement must be performed by an external equalised and / or calibrated
thermometer at the installation location. The difference between the actual temperature displayed on the
device and the actual temperature determined by the external measurement device must be entered in the
parameter field as an "Adjustment value".
Note
■
The calibration measurement should not be carried out immediately after the
device has been installed. The device should first adjust to the ambient
temperature before calibration is carried out. The calibration measurement
should be repeated shortly before or after the room is occupied.
■
This parameter is only available when the "Inputs of temperature reading"
parameter is set on "Internal measurement" or "Weighted measurement".
Pos: 30.123 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Überwachungszeit Temperaturerfassung (0 = keine Überwachung) (min) @ 40\mod_1421745300966_15.docx @ 313934 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.100 Temperature reading - Monitoring time for temperature reading (0 = no monitoring) (min)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 120
If no temperature is read within the parameterized time period, the device switches to error mode. It
transmits a telegram to the bus via the "Actual temperature error" object and applies the operating mode
and control value for error (0 - 255) settings.
Pos: 30.124 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 95
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.125 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Betriebsart bei Störung @ 40\mod_1421745421976_15.docx @ 313949 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.101 Temperature reading — Operating mode for fault
Options:
Cooling
Heating
In the event of a failure of the actual temperature measurement, the device will no longer be able to
independently specify the heating/cooling operating type. As a result, the operating type best suited to
protecting the building will be selected.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set on
"Heating and cooling" or "heating and cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.126 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Temperaturerfassung — Stellgröße bei Störung (0 - 255) @ 40\mod_1421745501614_15.docx @ 313964 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.102 Temperature reading - Control value for fault (0 - 255)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
In the event of a failure of the actual temperature measurement, the device will no longer be able to
independently determine the control value. Therefore, a control value which is suitable for protecting the
building will be selected.
Pos: 30.127 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Alarmfunktionen @ 40\mod_1421745673649_15.docx @ 313979 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.103 Alarm functions
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either
"Single device" or "Master device".
Pos: 30.128 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Alarmfunktionen — Kondenswasseralarm @ 40\mod_1421745740879_15.docx @ 313994 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.104 Alarm functions - Condensate water alarm
Options:
No
Yes
If a fan coil is used, condensation may form during operation as a result of excessive cooling and/or
humidity. The associated condensate is typically collected in a container. To protect the container against
overflowing, and thus prevent potential damage to devices and/or the building, the container alerts the
"Condensation alarm" object (receiving only) that the maximum fill level has been exceeded. This causes
the controller to switch to a protective mode. This status is indicated by the corresponding icon on devices
that have a display. Local operation is blocked. Operation is only possible again after the alarm has been
deactivated.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set
either on "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or
"Heating and cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.129 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
96 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.130 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Alarmfunktionen — Taupunktalarm @ 40\mod_1421745829394_15.docx @ 314009 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.105 Alarm functions — Dew point alarm
Options:
No
Yes
When refrigerating machines are used, dew may appear on the refrigerant supply lines during operation
as a result of excessive cooling and/or humidity. The dew indicator reports the dew formation via the "Dew
point alarm" object (receiving only). This causes the controller to switch to a protective mode. This status
is indicated by the corresponding icon on devices that have a display. Local operation is blocked.
Operation is only possible again after the alarm has been deactivated.
Note
This parameter is only available when the "Control function" parameter is set
either on "Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or
"Heating and cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.131 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Alarmfunktionen — Temperatur Frostalarm HVAC- u. RHCC-Status (°C) @ 40\mod_1421745887146_15.docx @ 314024 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.106 Alarm functions - Frost alarm temperature for HVAC and RHCC status (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 15
The RHCC status and HVAC objects have a frost alarm bit. It the input temperature of the controller drops
below the temperature set in this parameter, then the frost alarm bit is set in the status objects. It is reset
when the temperature is exceeded.
Pos: 30.132 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Alarmfunktionen — Temperatur Hitzealarm RHCC-Status (°C) @ 40\mod_1421745946645_15.docx @ 314039 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.107 Alarm functions - Heat alarm temperature for RHCC status (°C)
Options:
Setting option between 25 - 70
The RHCC status object has a heat alarm bit. If the input temperature of the controller exceeds the
temperature set in this parameter, then the heat alarm bit is set in the status object. It is reset when the
temperature falls below the set temperature.
Pos: 30.133 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen @ 40\mod_1421746005473_15.docx @ 314054 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.108 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either
"Single device" or "Master device" and the "Control value type" parameter is set
on "Fan coil".
Pos: 30.134 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen — Anzahl der Lüfterstufen @ 40\mod_1421746070041_15.docx @ 314069 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.109 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels Number of fan speed levels
Options:
3 levels
5 levels
This parameter is used to specify the number of fan speed levels the actuator will use to control the fan of
the fan coil.
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 97
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.135 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen — Format der Stufenausgabe @ 40\mod_1421746172066_15.docx @ 314084 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.110 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Format of the level output
Options:
0..5
0..255
1 bit m off n
1 bit m 1 off n
–
0 to 5: The level values (0..3 or 0..5) are output in the 1-byte format as the counter values 0..3 or 0..5.
–
0 to 255: The level values (0..3 or 0..5) are output as percentage values. Example 5-stage fan: The
level value 1 is output as 20%, and 5 is output as 100%.
–
1 Bit m from n: The level values (0..3 or 0..5) are output using 1-bit objects. The number of objects
available is the same as the number of fan speed levels. For level 2, for example, the 1-bit fan speed
level objects 1 and 2 are output as the value 1, while the other fan speed level objects use the value 0.
–
1 Bit 1 from n: The level values (0..3 or 0..5) are output using 1-bit objects. The number of objects
available is the same as the number of fan speed levels. For the level 2, for example, only the 1-bit fan
speed level object 2 is output as the value 1. The other fan speed level objects use the value 0.
Pos: 30.136 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen — Stufenausgabe @ 40\mod_1421746237446_15.docx @ 314099 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.111 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Level output
Options:
For manual operation and automatic
Only for manual operation
This parameter is used to specify when the output of the fan speed level values will occur: either only
when the fan speed levels are manually adjusted or also in automatic mode. This setting depends on the
options for the fan coil actuator. If the actuator itself controls the fan speed levels in automatic mode
based on a derivative of the control value, than the "Only for manual operation" option must be selected.
Otherwise, the other option should be selected.
Pos: 30.137 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen — Niedrigste manuell einstellbare Stufe @ 40\mod_1421746320532_15.docx @ 314114 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.112 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Lowest manually adjustable level
Options:
Level 0
Level 1
This parameter is used to preselect the lowest fan speed level that can be set by an operation performed
at the device. When level 0 is selected, the heating/cooling system will not be in operation (fan speed level
and valve control 0) as long as the current operating mode and operation type are maintained. To avoid
damage to the building, level 0 is deactivated after 18 hours and the device is returned to automatic mode.
Pos: 30.138 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
98 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.139 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen - Lüfterstufen — Auswertung Stufenstatus @ 40\mod_1421746389750_15.docx @ 314129 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.113 Fan coil settings - Fan speed levels - Level status evaluation
Options:
No
Yes
The controller obtains the current fan speed level for controlling a fan coil actuator either by calculating it
from the table of level values under "Fan coil settings for heating" or "Fan coil settings for cooling", or by
receiving feedback from the fan coil actuator. If the "Yes" option is selected, the "Fan coil step status"
object is activated for receiving the fan speed level from the fan coil actuator.
Pos: 30.140 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Heizen @ 40\mod_1421746450029_15.docx @ 314144 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.114 Fan coil settings heating
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either
"Single device" or "Master device" and the "Control value type" parameter is set
on "Fan coil". In addition, the "Control function" parameter must be set on either
"Heating", "Heating with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.141 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Heizen — Lüfterstufe 1- 5 bis Stellgröße (0 - 255) Heizen @ 40\mod_1421746567638_15.docx @ 314159 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.115 Fan coil settings for heating - Speed level 1 to 5 up to control value (0 to 255) heating
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
In this parameter, the control values of the controller are assigned to fan speed levels. This assignment is
used if the fan speed levels are transmitted together with the control values.
Note
■
These level settings should be adjusted to match the settings in the fan coil
actuator.
■
Setting the "Control value type" to "Fan coil" in the control parameters is only
useful for one of either the basic stage or the additional stage. Setting the
basic and additional stage parameters to fan coil is not useful, since the
control of only one fan coil actuator each for heating and cooling is supported.
■
The "Fan speed level 4 - 5 up to control value (0 - 255) heating“ parameters
are available only when the "Number of fan speed levels" is set on "5 levels".
Pos: 30.142 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Heizen — Lüfterstufenbegrenzung Heizen bei Ecobetrieb @ 40\mod_1421746645592_15.docx @ 314174 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.116 Fan coil settings for heating - Fan speed level limit heating for eco mode
Options:
No
Yes
This parameter limits the fan speed level when the system is switched to eco mode.
Pos: 30.143 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 99
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 30.144 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Heizen — max. Lüfterstufe Heizen bei Ecobetrieb @ 40\mod_1421746713358_15.docx @ 314189 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.117 Fan coil settings for heating - Maximum speed level heating for eco mode
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 5
Specifies the maximum possible fan speed level when the system is switched to eco mode.
Pos: 30.145 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421746779519_15.docx @ 314204 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.118 Fan coil settings for cooling
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either
"Single device" or "Master device" and the "Control value type" parameter is set
on "Fan coil". In addition, the "Control function" parameter must be set on either
"Cooling", "Cooling with additional stage", "Heating and cooling" or "Heating and
cooling with additional stages".
Pos: 30.146 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Kühlen — Lüfterstufe 1- 5 bis Stellgröße (0 - 255) Kühlen @ 40\mod_1421746840594_15.docx @ 314219 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.119 Fan coil settings for cooling - Speed level 1 to 5 up to control value (0 to 255) cooling
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 255
In this parameter, the control values of the controller are assigned to fan speed levels. This assignment is
used if the fan speed levels are transmitted together with the control values.
Note
■
These level settings should be adjusted to match the settings in the fan coil
actuator.
■
Setting the "Control value type" to "Fan coil" in the control parameters is only
useful for one of either the basic stage or the additional stage. Setting the
basic and additional stage parameters to fan coil is not useful, since the
control of only one fan coil actuator each for heating and cooling is supported.
■
The "Fan speed level 4 - 5 up to control value (0 - 255) cooling“ parameters
are available only when the "Number of fan speed levels" is set on "5 levels".
Pos: 30.147 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Kühlen — Lüfterstufenbegrenzung Kühlen bei Ecobetrieb @ 40\mod_1421746915412_15.docx @ 314234 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.120 Fan coil settings for cooling - Fan speed level limit cooling for eco mode
Options:
No
Yes
This parameter limits the fan speed level when the system is switched to eco mode.
Pos: 30.148 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Fancoil Einstellungen Kühlen — max. Lüfterstufe Kühlen bei Ecobetrieb @ 40\mod_1421746987219_15.docx @ 314249 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.121 Fan coil settings for cooling - Maximum fan speed level cooling for eco mode
Options:
Setting option between 0 - 5
Specifies the maximum possible fan speed level when the system is switched to eco mode.
Pos: 30.149 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
100 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 30.150 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation @ 40\mod_1421748510803_15.docx @ 314264 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.122 Summer compensation
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Device function" parameter is set on either
"Single device" or "Master device".
Pos: 30.151 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation — Sommerkompensation @ 40\mod_1421751085960_15.docx @ 314339 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.123 Summer compensation - Summer compensation
Options:
No
Yes
In order to save energy, and to ensure that the temperature difference occurring during entry and exit of a
climate-controlled building stays within comfortable limits, the excessive reduction of room temperature
should be prevented during high temperatures in the summer ( Summer compensation according to DIN
1946). The room temperature is increased by adjusting the setpoint temperature for cooling.
Raising the room temperature does not, however, mean that you heat up the room. Rather, the
adjustment is intended to allow the room temperature to increase to a certain setpoint without cooling.
This, for example, prevents the air-conditioning system from further reducing the room temperature to
24°C with an external temperature of 35°C.
However, activation of the summer compensation requires an outside temperature sensor that transmits
its measured value to the bus and can be evaluated by the room temperature controller.
The following parameters are available for summer compensation:
■
"Lower outside temperature value for summer compensation",
■
"Upper outside temperature value for summer compensation",
■
“Lower setpoint offset for summer compensation",
■
“Upper setpoint offset for summer compensation"
Above the "Upper outside temperature value", the minimum setpoint temperature for cooling is the outside
temperature minus the "Upper setpoint offset". The outside temperature has no effect on the minimum
setpoint temperature for cooling below the "Lower outside temperature value". Between the "Lower" and
"Upper outside temperature value", the minimum setpoint temperature for cooling undergoes floating
adjustment by the parameterized setpoint temperature equal to the outside temperature minus the "Lower
offset" to a value equal to the outside temperature minus the "Upper setpoint offset" as a function of the
outside temperature.
Typical values for summer compensation are:
■
21°C: Lower outside temperature value
■
32°C: Upper outside temperature value
■
0 K: Lower setpoint offset
■
6 K: Upper setpoint offset
This means that a continuous increase of the minimum setpoint value for cooling occurs to a value equal
to the outside temperature minus a setpoint offset of 0 to 6 K if the outside temperature increases to 32°C
from 21°C.
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 101
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
For example:
For an increasing outside temperature, the minimum setpoint value for cooling will be increased starting at
an outside temperature of 21°C. The minimum setpoint temperature for cooling is 25.1°C at an outside
temperature of 30°C; 25.5°C at an outside temperature of 31°C; 26°C at an outside temperature of 32°C;
and 27°C at an outside temperature of 33°C.
Pos: 30.152 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation — (untere) Einstiegstemperatur für Sommerkompensation (°C) @ 40\mod_1421751187688_15.docx @ 314354 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.124 Summer compensation - (Lower) Starting temperature for summer compensation (°C)
Options:
Setting option between -127 - 127
The parameter defines the lower outside temperature value up to which temperature value the setpoint
correction (summer compensation) is performed based on too high an outside temperature.
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Summer compensation" parameter is set
to "Yes".
Pos: 30.153 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation — Offset der Solltemperatur beim Einstieg in die Sommerkompensation (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421748718830_15.docx @ 314294 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.125 Summer compensation - Offset of the set-point temperature for the entry into summer compensation (x
0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between -127 - 127
The parameter is used to define how many degrees Kelvin the setpoint value will be increased by during
summer compensation when the lower temperature value is reached.
Typical values for summer compensation are:
■
20°C: Lower outside temperature value
■
32°C: Upper outside temperature value
■
0 K: Lower setpoint offset
■
4 K: Upper setpoint offset
That means that a flowing setpoint increase of 0 to 4 K occurs if the outside temperature increases from
20°C to 32°C.
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Summer compensation" parameter is set
to "Yes".
Pos: 30.154 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation — (obere) Ausstiegstemperatur für Sommerkompensation (°C) @ 40\mod_1421748794070_15.docx @ 314309 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.126 Summer compensation - (Upper) exit temperature for summer compensation (°C)
Options:
Setting option between -127 - 127
The parameter defines the upper outside temperature value up to which temperature value the setpoint
correction (summer compensation) is performed based on too high an outside temperature.
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Summer compensation" parameter is set
to "Yes".
Pos: 30.155 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Applikation/Objekt-RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation — Offset der Solltemperatur beim Ausstieg aus der Sommerkompensation (x 0,1°C) @ 40\mod_1421748869340_15.docx @ 314324 @ 3 @ 1
102 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
12.1.127 Summer compensation - Offset of the set-point temperature for the exit from summer compensation (x
0.1°C)
Options:
Setting option between -127 - 127
The parameter is used to define how many degrees Kelvin the setpoint value will be increased by during
summer compensation when the upper temperature value is reached.
Typical values for summer compensation are:
■
20°C: Lower outside temperature value
■
32°C: Upper outside temperature value
■
0 K: Lower setpoint offset
■
4 K: Upper setpoint offset
That means that a flowing setpoint increase of 0 to 4 K occurs if the outside temperature increases from
20°C to 32°C.
Note
This parameter is only available if the "Summer compensation" parameter is set
to "Yes".
Pos: 31 /Layout bis 2014-11-11/Online-Dokumentation (+KNX)/Steuermodule - Online-Dokumentation (--> Für alle Dokumente <--)/++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch ++++++++++++ @ 9\mod_1268898668093_0.docx @ 52149 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 103
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 32.1 /DinA-4 -- Online/1.1
Überschrift/Applikations-/Parameterbeschreibungen/Kommunikationsobjekte — RTR @ 41\mod_1422464590262_15.docx @ 330520 @ 2 @ 1
12.2
12.2.1
Communication objects - RTC
Heating control value
Pos: 32.2 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Stellgröße Heizen @ 41\mod_1422460560200_15.docx @ 329734 @ 3 @ 1
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
1
Heating control value (control
value heating/cooling)
Output
1. Switching
2. Percent (0 to
100%)
Description:
1. This object is used to operate a switching actuating drive, e.g. a thermoelectric positioner, that is
controlled by a switching/heating actuator.
2. This object is used to control an actuating drive with a continuous input value (0%..100%), e.g. an
electromotive actuating drive.
Pos: 32.3 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Heizen @ 41\mod_1422460646672_15.docx @ 329750 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.2
Additional heating stage
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
2
Additional heating stage
(additional heating/cooling stage)
Output
1. Switching
2. Percent (0 to
100%)
Description:
1. This object is used to operate a switching actuating drive, e.g. a thermoelectric positioner, that is
controlled by a switching/heating actuator.
2. This object is used to control an actuating drive with a continuous input value (0%..100%), e.g. an
electromotive actuating drive.
Note
The additional stage can also be used as a parallel second heating stage. To do
this, set the parameter for the temperature difference to the basic stage to 0°C.
Pos: 32.4 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Stellgröße Kühlen @ 41\mod_1422460706343_15.docx @ 329766 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.3
Cooling control value
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
3
Cooling control value
Output
1. Switching
2. Percent (0 to
100%)
Description:
1. This object is used to operate a switching actuating drive, e.g. a thermoelectric positioner, that is
controlled by a switching/heating actuator.
2. This object is used to control an actuating drive with a continuous input value (0%..100%), e.g. an
electromotive actuating drive.
Pos: 32.5 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
104 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 32.6 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Zusatzstufe Kühlen @ 41\mod_1422460775701_15.docx @ 329782 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.4
Additional cooling stage
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
4
Additional cooling stage
Output
1. Switching
2. Percent (0 to
100%)
Description:
1. This object is used to operate a switching actuating drive, e.g. a thermoelectric positioner, that is
controlled by a switching/heating actuator.
2. This object is used to control an actuating drive with a continuous input value (0%..100%), e.g. an
electromotive actuating drive.
Note
The additional stage can also be used as a parallel second cooling stage. To do
this, set the parameter for the temperature difference to the basic stage to 0°C.
Pos: 32.7 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Regelung Ein/Aus @ 41\mod_1422460821878_15.docx @ 329798 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.5
Control On/Off
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
5
1. Control On/Off
Output
Switching
2. Control On/Off (master)
Output
Switching
3. Control On/Off (slave)
Output
Switching
If a 0 telegram is received, the controller switches to OFF mode and regulates the temperature to the
setpoint value for frost/heat protection. When the controller is switched on again, the remaining operating
mode objects are queried in order to determine the new operating mode.
Note
About item 2:
During active ON/OFF controller function in master/slave mode the ON/OFF
(master) control object is to be linked with this object.
About item 3:
During active ON/OFF controller function in master/slave mode the ON/OFF (slave) control object is to be
linked with this object.
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 105
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 32.8 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Ist-Temperatur @ 41\mod_1422460874482_15.docx @ 329814 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.6
Actual temperature
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
6
1. Actual temperature
Output
2-byte floating point
value
2. Actual temperature weighted
Output
2-byte floating point
value
1. The object outputs the measured (room) temperature, adjusted by the calibration value.
2. The object outputs the temperature value which is calculated from the recording and weighting of
internal and up to two external temperatures.
Note
An external temperature measurement for room control may be practical for larger
rooms and/or floor heating.
Pos: 32.9 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Externe Ist-Temperatur @ 41\mod_1422460928926_15.docx @ 329830 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.7
External actual temperature
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
7
External actual temperature
Input
2-byte floating point
value
2-byte communication object for reading an external temperature value provided via the KNX bus.
Pos: 32.10 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Externe Ist-Temperatur 2 @ 41\mod_1422460982185_15.docx @ 329846 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.8
External actual temperature 2
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
8
External actual temperature 2
Input
2-byte floating point
value
2-byte communication object for reading an additional external temperature value provided via the KNX
bus.
106 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 32.11 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Störung Ist-Temperatur @ 41\mod_1422461044836_15.docx @ 329862 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.9
Fault, actual temperature
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
9
1. Fault, actual temperature
Output
Switching
2. Fault, actual temperature
(master)
Output
Switching
3. Fault, actual temperature
(slave)
Output
Switching
If one of the parameterized input temperatures is unavailable to the controller for a period longer than the
monitoring time, the controller enters the error mode. The error mode is sent to the bus as the value 1.
Note
About item 2:
This object must be connected to the "Fault, actual temperature (slave)" object in
order to indicate the error mode.
About item 3:
This object must be connected to the "Fault, actual temperature (slave)" object in
order to indicate the error mode.
Pos: 32.12 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lokale Ist-Temperatur @ 41\mod_1422461103648_15.docx @ 329878 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.10
Local actual temperature
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
10
Local actual temperature
Output
Switching
Not visible!
Pos: 32.13 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 107
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 32.14 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Aktueller Sollwert @ 41\mod_1422461201961_15.docx @ 329894 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.11
Current setpoint
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
11
Current setpoint
Output
2-byte floating point
value
The object outputs the current setpoint temperature resulting from the following: the parameterized
setpoint temperature of the current operation type and operating mode, the manual setpoint temperature
adjustment, a change in the base setpoint temperature via the base setpoint value object. This is purely a
transmitting object.
Pos: 32.15 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Betriebsmodus @ 41\mod_1422461261600_15.docx @ 329910 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.12
Operating mode
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
12
1. Operating mode
Input / output
HVAC mode
2. Operating mode (master)
Input / output
HVAC mode
3. Operating mode (slave)
Input / output
HVAC mode
The "Operating mode" object receives, as a 1-byte value, the operating mode that is to be set. Here value
1 means "Comfort", value 2 "Standby", value 3 "Economy" and value 4 "Frost/heat protection".
In addition to manual setpoint adjustment and the adjustment of the basic setpoint value, the setpoint
temperature of the controller can also be defined by objects "Superimposed operating mode",
"Condensate ware alarm", "Dew alarm", "Window contact", "Control On/Off", "Presence detector" and
"Operating mode (listed in decreasing order of priority).
Note
Item 2:
If the master/slave mode is the active operating mode, the Operating mode
(slave) object must be connected to this object.
Item 3:
If the master/slave mode is the active operating mode, the operating mode
(master) object must be connected to this object.
Pos: 32.16 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
108 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 32.17 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Betriebsmodus überlagert @ 41\mod_1422461351816_15.docx @ 329926 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.13
Superimposed operating mode
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
13
1. Superimposed operating
mode
Input
HVAC mode
2. Superimposed operating
mode (master/slave)
Input
HVAC mode
The "Superimposed operating mode" object receives the operating mode that is to be set as 1-byte value.
Here value 0 means "Superimposition inactive", value 1 "Comfort", value 2 "Standby", value 3 "Economy"
and value 4 "Frost/heat protection".
In addition to manual setpoint adjustment and the adjustment of the basic setpoint value, the setpoint
temperature of the controller can also be defined by objects "Superimposed operating mode",
"Condensate ware alarm", "Dew alarm", "Window contact", "Control On/Off", "Presence detector" and
"Operating mode (listed in decreasing order of priority).
Note
Item 2:
If the master/slave mode is active, the "Superimposed operating mode" object of
the master and the slave must be connected to the group address of the
transmitter.
Pos: 32.18 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Fensterkontakt @ 41\mod_1422461410317_15.docx @ 329942 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.14
Window contact
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
14
1. Window contact
Input
Switching
2. Window contact
(master/slave)
Input
Switching
The object uses the value 1 to signal an open window to the controller. If no other object with a higher
priority is present, then the "Window contact" message causes the controller to be set to the setpoint value
for frost/heat protection. In addition to manual setpoint adjustment and the adjustment of the basic setpoint
value, the setpoint temperature of the controller can also be defined by objects "Superimposed operating
mode", "Condensate water alarm", "Dew alarm", "Window contact", "Control On/Off", "Presence detector"
and "Operating mode (listed in decreasing order of priority).
Note
Item 2:
If the master/slave mode is active, the "Window contact (master/slave)" object of
the master and the slave must be connected to the group address of the
transmitter.
Pos: 32.19 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 109
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 32.20 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Präsenzmelder @ 41\mod_1422461461798_15.docx @ 329958 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.15
Presence detector
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
15
1. Presence detector
Input
Switching
2. Presence detector
(master/slave)
Input
Switching
This object transmits the value 1 to the controller to signal that there are people in the room. If not other
object with a higher priority is present, then the "Presence detector" causes the controller to be set to the
comfort setpoint value. In addition to manual setpoint adjustment and the adjustment of the basic setpoint
value, the setpoint temperature of the controller can also be defined by objects "Superimposed operating
mode", "Condensate water alarm", "Dew alarm", "Window contact", "Control On/Off", "Presence detector"
and "Operating mode (listed in decreasing order of priority).
Note
Item 2:
If the master/slave mode is active, the "Presence detector (master/slave)" object
of the master and the slave must be connected to the group address of the
transmitter.
Pos: 32.21 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Status Heizen @ 41\mod_1422461503076_15.docx @ 329974 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.16
Heating status
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
16
Heating status
Output
Switching
The room temperature controller sends an ON telegram via the "Heating status" object as soon as it is
active in the heating mode. If the controller is in the inactive zone between heating and cooling or is in
cooling mode, the room temperature controller transmits an OFF telegram on the "Heating status" object.
Pos: 32.22 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Status Kühlen @ 41\mod_1422461557645_15.docx @ 329990 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.17
Cooling status
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
17
Cooling status
Output
Switching
The room temperature controller sends an ON telegram via the "Cooling status" object as soon as it is
active in the cooling mode. If the controller is in the inactive zone between heating and cooling or is in
heating mode, the room temperature controller transmits an OFF telegram on the "Cooling status" object.
Pos: 32.23 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
110 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 32.24 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Grundlast @ 41\mod_1422461616973_15.docx @ 330006 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.18
Basic load
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
16
Basic load
Input / output
Switching
This object uses the value 1 to activate a parameterized base load, i.e. a minimum control value greater
than zero. The value 0 deactivates the base load. When the base load is deactivated, the control value
can be lowered all the way to zero if necessary when the setpoint temperature is reached, despite the
minimum value set in the parameter.
Note
Deactivating the basic load for a floor heating system is always useful in the
summer, since it saves heating energy.
Pos: 32.25 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Umschaltung Heizen/Kühlen @ 41\mod_1422461683726_15.docx @ 330022 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.19
Switchover heating/cooling
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
17
Switchover heating/cooling
Input / output
Switching
1. Automatic: If the switchover between heating and cooling is performed automatically by the room
temperature controller, then this object is used to provide information on the current heating (0) or
cooling (1) status to the KNX bus. It is a transmitting object.
2. Only via object: The switchover between heating and cooling on the room temperature controller
occurs solely via this 1-bit communication object. The value (0) activates the heating mode, and the
value (1) activates the cooling mode. This is a receiving object.
3. Manual or via object: The switchover between heating and cooling on the room temperature controller
occurs by user interaction or via the 1-bit communication object. The information on the respective
heating (0) or cooling (1) status is available to the KNX bus. This is a receiving and sending object.
Pos: 32.26 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 111
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 32.27 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Fancoil manuell @ 41\mod_1422461766907_15.docx @ 330038 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.20
Fan coil manual
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
18
1. Fan coil manual
Output
Switching
2. Fan coil manual (master)
Output
Switching
3. Fan coil manual (slave)
Output
Switching
Using this 1-bit communication object, a fan coil actuator can be placed in manual fan mode or returned to
automatic fan mode. In the automatic fan mode of the fan coil actuator, the fan's rotational speed is
defined in the fan coil actuator using the control value. In manual fan operation, the user of the room
temperature controller can set the fan's rotational speed as needed. This setting will remain active until it
is reset. The fan speed level 0 is an exception: to avoid damage to the building, automatic mode is
activated again 18 hours after fan speed level 0 is selected.
Note
Item 2:
If fan coil manual is active in the master/slave mode, the fan coil manual (slave)
object must be connected to this object.
Item 3:
If fan coil manual is active in the master/slave mode, the fan coil manual (master)
object must be connected to this object.
Pos: 32.28 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Fancoil Stufe @ 41\mod_1422461829339_15.docx @ 330054 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.21
Fan coil step
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
19
1. Fan coil step
Output
2-byte floating point
value
2. Fan coil step (master)
Output
2-byte floating point
value
3. Fan coil step (slave)
Output
2-byte floating point
value
The fan speed level in the fan coil actuator is selected via the 1-byte communication object. Whether the
fan speed level information is transmitted in manual or also in automatic fan speed level mode can be set.
The formats that can be selected for the 1-byte communication object are the fan speed level (0..5) or a
percentage value (0..100%) which is calculated back to a fan speed level in the fan coil actuator.
Note
Item 2:
If fan coil step is active in the master/slave mode, the fan coil step (slave) object
must be connected to this object.
Item 3:
If fan coil step is active in the master/slave mode, the fan coil step (slave) object
must be connected to this object.
Pos: 32.29 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
112 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 32.30 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Status Fancoil Stufe @ 41\mod_1422461897948_15.docx @ 330070 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.22
Fan coil step status
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
20
Fan coil step status
Input / output
2-byte floating point
value
Using the "Fan coil step status" object, the room temperature controller receives the current fan speed
level of the fan coil actuator.
Pos: 32.31 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe 1 @ 41\mod_1422461948945_15.docx @ 330086 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.23
Fan speed level 1
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
21
Fan speed level 1
Output
Switching
This 1-bit communication object is used to output the active status (1) of the fan speed level, while the
other fan speed levels are deactivated (0), depending on the parameter setting. If the fan speed level is
inactive, the object has a value of (0).
Pos: 32.32 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe 2 @ 41\mod_1422462014295_15.docx @ 330102 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.24
Fan speed level 2
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
22
Fan speed level 2
Output
Switching
This 1-bit communication object is used to output the active status (1) of the fan speed level, while the
other fan speed levels are deactivated (0), depending on the parameter setting. If the fan speed level is
inactive, the object has a value of (0).
Pos: 32.33 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe 3 @ 41\mod_1422462083123_15.docx @ 330118 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.25
Fan speed level 3
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
23
Fan speed level 3
Output
Switching
This 1-bit communication object is used to output the active status (1) of the fan speed level, while the
other fan speed levels are deactivated (0), depending on the parameter setting. If the fan speed level is
inactive, the object has a value of (0).
Pos: 32.34 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe 4 @ 41\mod_1422462149439_15.docx @ 330134 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.26
Fan speed level 4
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
24
Fan speed level 4
Output
Switching
This 1-bit communication object is used to output the active status (1) of the fan speed level, while the
other fan speed levels are deactivated (0), depending on the parameter setting. If the fan speed level is
inactive, the object has a value of (0).
Pos: 32.35 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 113
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 32.36 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe 5 @ 41\mod_1422462258250_15.docx @ 330150 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.27
Fan speed level 5
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
25
Fan speed level 5
Output
Switching
This 1-bit communication object is used to output the active status (1) of the fan speed level, while the
other fan speed levels are deactivated (0), depending on the parameter setting. If the fan speed level is
inactive, the object has a value of (0).
Pos: 32.37 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Basissollwert @ 41\mod_1422462307375_15.docx @ 330166 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.28
Basic setpoint
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
26
Basic setpoint
Input
2-byte floating point
value
This 2-byte communication object can be used to change/adjust the parameterized basic setpoint value
via the KNX bus. Parameters can be used to define whether the value received by this object is
interpreted as "Setpoint heating comfort", "Setpoint cooling comfort" or an average between heating and
cooling comfort.
Pos: 32.38 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Manuelle Sollwerte zurücksetzen @ 41\mod_1422462367202_15.docx @ 330182 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.29
Resetting manual setpoints
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
27
Resetting manual setpoints
Input
Switching
This 1-bit communication object is used to reset the manual setpoint adjustment that was set on the
device.
Pos: 32.39 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Taupunktalarm @ 41\mod_1422462410945_15.docx @ 330198 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.30
Dew point alarm
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
28
Dew point alarm
Input
Switching
This 1-bit communication object is used to place the controller in the dew point alarm mode. This causes
the current setpoint value to be set to the heat protection setpoint value in order to keep the structure from
being damaged by dew.
Note
This protective mechanism is only active in the cooling mode. It remains in place
until it is cancelled by the value (0). When an alarm is active, manual operation of
the controller is blocked. This information is indicated by a corresponding icon on
the control unit.
Pos: 32.40 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
114 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 32.41 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Kondenswasseralarm @ 41\mod_1422462477605_15.docx @ 330214 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.31
Condensate water alarm
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
29
1. Condensate water alarm
Input
Switching
2. Condensate water alarm
(master/slave)
Input
Switching
This 1-bit communication object is used to place the controller in the condensation alarm mode. This
causes the current setpoint value to be set to the heat protection setpoint value in order to keep the
structure from being damaged by an overflowing condensation container.
Note
Item 1:
This protective mechanism is only active in the cooling mode. It remains in place
until it is cancelled by the value (0). When an alarm is active, manual operation of
the controller is blocked. This information is indicated by a corresponding icon on
the device.
Item 2:
■
This protective mechanism is only active in the cooling mode. It remains in
place until it is cancelled by the value (0). When an alarm is active, manual
operation of the controller is blocked. This information is indicated by a
corresponding icon on the device.
■
When the master/slave mode is active, the condensate water alarm
(master/slave) objects must be connected to the alarm transmitter.
Pos: 32.42 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Außentemperatur für Sommerkompensation @ 41\mod_1422462544140_15.docx @ 330230 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.32
Outside temperature for summer compensation
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
30
Outside temperature for summer
compensation
Input
2-byte floating point
value
In order to save energy, and to ensure that the temperature difference occurring during entry and exit of a
climate-controlled building stays within comfortable limits, the reduction of room temperature by cooling
devices should be limited as a function of the outside temperature (summer compensation). This, for
example, prevents the air-conditioning system from further reducing the room temperature to 24°C with an
outside temperature of 35°C.
This function can only be used with an outside temperature sensor. This 2-byte communication object
must then be used to provide the controller with the current outside temperature.
Pos: 32.43 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 115
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 32.44 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Sommerkompensation aktiv @ 41\mod_1422462598038_15.docx @ 330246 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.33
Summer compensation active
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
31
Summer compensation active
Output
Switching
This 1-bit communication object is used to indicate via the bus whether the summer compensation is
active (1) or inactive (0). If it is active, the setpoint value configured for the cooling mode is increased by
the summer compensation function. A decrease of the cooling mode setpoint temperature below the value
calculated by the parameterized summer compensation function is not possible. An increase of the
setpoint temperature for the cooling mode is always possible.
Pos: 32.45 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Sollwert erreicht @ 41\mod_1422462658832_15.docx @ 330262 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.34
Setpoint reached
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
32
Setpoint reached
Output
Switching
When the setpoint set on the device in comfort mode has been reached it is sent by means of value (1) as
information to the KNX bus via the 1-bit communication object. The function is started by activating the
comfort or presence mode. If the reaching of the setpoint temperature is interfered with by the preselection
of a different operating mode or by adjustment to a new setpoint, value (0) is sent.
Pos: 32.46 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Fahrenheit @ 41\mod_1422462709283_15.docx @ 330278 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.35
Fahrenheit
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
33
1. Fahrenheit
Input / output
Switching
2. Fahrenheit (master)
Input / output
Switching
3. Fahrenheit (slave)
Input / output
Switching
The temperature indication on the display can be changed from Celsius (°C) to Fahrenheit (°F). The
conversion from Celsius to Fahrenheit always takes place in the display unit, since only Celsius values are
sent over the KNX bus. The value (0) results in a temperature indication in Celsius, while the value (1)
results in Fahrenheit.
Note
Item 2:
If the Fahrenheit object is active in the master/slave mode, the Fahrenheit (slave)
object must be connected to this object.
Item 3:
If the Fahrenheit object is active in the master/slave mode, the Fahrenheit
(master) object must be connected to this object.
Pos: 32.47 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
116 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 32.48 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Displayhinterleuchtung @ 41\mod_1422462794539_15.docx @ 330294 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.36
Display backlighting
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
34
Display backlighting
Input / output
Switching
The display backlighting is activated with value (1) and deactivated with value (0) via the 1-bit
communication object.
Note
This function is mainly used in rooms where backlighting during the night is
considered to be a disturbing factor, such as in hotel rooms and bedrooms.
Pos: 32.49 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Ein/Aus Anforderung @ 41\mod_1422462841667_15.docx @ 330310 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.37
On/Off request
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
35
1. On/off request (master)
Input
Switching
2. On/off request (slave)
Input
Switching
This 1-bit communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order
to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.
Pos: 32.50 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Sollwertanzeige @ 41\mod_1422462896751_15.docx @ 330326 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.38
Setpoint display
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
36
1. Setpoint display (master)
Input / output
2-byte floating point
value
2. Setpoint display (slave)
Input / output
2-byte floating point
value
This 2-byte communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in
order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.
Pos: 32.51 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Sollwert anfordern @ 41\mod_1422462975017_15.docx @ 330342 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.39
Request setpoint
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
37
1. Request setpoint (master)
Input
Percent (0..100%)
2. Request setpoint (slave)
Input
Percent (0..100%)
This 1-byte communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in
order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.
Pos: 32.52 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Sollwert bestätigen @ 41\mod_1422463038385_15.docx @ 330358 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.40
Confirm setpoint
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
38
1. Confirm setpoint (master)
Input / output
Percent (0..100%)
2. Confirm setpoint (slave)
Input / output
Percent (0..100%)
This 1-byte communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in
order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 117
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
Pos: 32.53 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Heizen/Kühlen Anforderung @ 41\mod_1422463103267_15.docx @ 330374 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.41
Heating/cooling request
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
39
1. Heating/cooling request
(master)
Input
Switching
2. Heating/cooling request
(slave)
Input
Switching
This 1-bit communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order
to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.
Pos: 32.54 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe man. anfordern @ 41\mod_1422463169645_15.docx @ 330390 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.42
Request fan speed level manual
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
40
1. Request fan speed level
manual (master)
Input
Switching
2. Request fan speed level
manual (slave)
Input
Switching
This 1-bit communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in order
to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.
Pos: 32.55 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe anfordern @ 41\mod_1422463241890_15.docx @ 330406 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.43
Request fan speed level
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
41
1. Request fan speed level
(master)
Input
Percent (0..100%)
2. Request fan speed level
(slave)
Input
Percent (0..100%)
This 1-byte communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in
order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.
Pos: 32.56 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Lüfterstufe bestätigen @ 41\mod_1422463290126_15.docx @ 330422 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.44
Confirm fan speed level
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
42
1. Confirm fan speed level
(master)
Input / output
Percent (0..100%)
2. Confirm fan speed level
(slave)
Input / output
Percent (0..100%)
This 1-byte communication object must be connected to the respective slave communication object in
order to synchronise the devices in the master/slave configuration.
Pos: 32.57 /Systemmodule/++++++++++++++ Seitenumbruch +++++++++++++++ @ 41\mod_1422789416992_0.docx @ 333487 @ @ 1
118 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
Pos: 32.58 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Regler-Status RHCC @ 41\mod_1422463365069_15.docx @ 330438 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.45
Controller status RHCC
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
43
Controller status RHCC
Output
2-byte floating point
value
This communication object outputs the heating/cooling operation type, active/inactive operation, the frost
and heat alarm, and the error (actual temperature reading failure) in accordance with the specification for
the RHCC (Room Heating Cooling Controller) status.
Pos: 32.59 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/Regler-Status HVAC @ 41\mod_1422463419311_15.docx @ 330454 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.46
Controller status HVAC
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
44
1. Controller status HVAC
Output
Percent (0..100%)
2. Controller status HVAC
(master)
Output
Percent (0..100%)
3. Controller status HVAC
(slave)
Output
Percent (0..100%)
This communication object outputs the current operating mode, the heating/cooling mode, active/inactive
mode, the frost alarm and the dew point alarm in accordance with the specification for the HVAC (Heating
Ventilation Air Conditioning) status.
Note
Item 2:
If the master/slave mode is active, the HVAC status (slave) object must be
connected to this object.
Item 3:
If the master/slave mode is active, the HVAC status (master) object must be
connected to this object.
Pos: 32.60 /DinA-4 -- Online/Applikations- / Parameterbeschreibungen -- (KNX)/Kommunikationsobjekte/Objekt-RTR / RTR/Module/In Betrieb @ 41\mod_1422463489964_15.docx @ 330470 @ 3 @ 1
12.2.47
Commissioned
Number
Name
Object function
Data type
45
Commissioned
Output
Switching
The controller uses this 1-bit communication object to send a cyclical "sign of life". This signal can be used
to monitor the device, e.g. by means of a visualisation.
=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Content ===
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 119
KNX Technical Reference Manual
Busch-priOn®
120 | 1473-1-8687 | KNX Technical Reference Manual
KNX Technical Reference Manual | 1473-1-8687 | 121
Contact us
Busch-Jaeger Elektro GmbH
PO box
58505 Lüdenscheid
Notice
We reserve the right to at all times make technical
changes as well as changes to the contents of this
document without prior notice.
The detailed specifications agreed to at the time of
ordering apply to all orders. ABB accepts no
responsibility for possible errors or incompleteness in
this document.
Freisenbergstraße 2
58513 Lüdenscheid
Germany
We reserve all rights to this document and the topics
and illustrations contained therein. The document and
its contents, or extracts thereof, must not be
reproduced, transmitted or reused by third parties
without prior written consent by ABB.
www.BUSCH-JAEGER.de
info.bje@de.abb.com
Copyright© 2015 Busch-Jaeger Elektro GmbH
All rights reserved
Central sales service:
Phone:
+49 (0) 2351 956-1600
Fax:
+49 (0) 2351 956-1700
=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Backcover ===
1473-1-8687 |
A member of the ABB Group
| 29.01.2015
Pos: 34 /KNX-Produkthandbücher/RückseitenRückseite - BJE-Variante @ 32\mod_1357201421897_15.docx @ 262132 @ @ 1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising